WO2025179524A1 - Reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception points - Google Patents
Reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception pointsInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025179524A1 WO2025179524A1 PCT/CN2024/079258 CN2024079258W WO2025179524A1 WO 2025179524 A1 WO2025179524 A1 WO 2025179524A1 CN 2024079258 W CN2024079258 W CN 2024079258W WO 2025179524 A1 WO2025179524 A1 WO 2025179524A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- reference signal
- burst
- occasion
- interval
- trp
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/10—Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/022—Site diversity; Macro-diversity
- H04B7/024—Co-operative use of antennas of several sites, e.g. in co-ordinated multipoint or co-operative multiple-input multiple-output [MIMO] systems
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
- H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
- H04B7/0695—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
- H04B7/06952—Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping
- H04B7/06968—Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping using quasi-colocation [QCL] between signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
- H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
- H04L5/0023—Time-frequency-space
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/0091—Signalling for the administration of the divided path, e.g. signalling of configuration information
- H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
Definitions
- the following relates to wireless communications, including reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception points.
- Wireless communications systems are widely deployed to provide various types of communication content such as voice, video, packet data, messaging, broadcast, and so on. These systems may be capable of supporting communication with multiple users by sharing the available system resources (e.g., time, frequency, and power) .
- Examples of such multiple-access systems include fourth generation (4G) systems such as Long Term Evolution (LTE) systems, LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) systems, or LTE-A Pro systems, and fifth generation (5G) systems which may be referred to as New Radio (NR) systems.
- 4G systems such as Long Term Evolution (LTE) systems, LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) systems, or LTE-A Pro systems
- 5G systems which may be referred to as New Radio (NR) systems.
- a wireless multiple-access communications system may include one or more base stations, each supporting wireless communication for communication devices, which may be known as user equipment (UE) .
- UE user equipment
- Some examples of the techniques described herein provide reference signaling for estimating frequency offsets between transmission-reception points (TRPs) .
- Some approaches to enhance the phase offset accuracy may include increasing the time interval of the measurement resources.
- N sets of single-port channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) may be utilized, where each set includes L CSI-RSs with the same quasi co-location (QCL) value (e.g., each set corresponds to each burst and each TRP) .
- QCL quasi co-location
- L sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes N single-port CSI-RSs with N QCL values (e.g., each set may correspond to all TRPs at an occasion group) .
- each CSI-RS may correspond to each burst and each TRP, thus each having one QCL value
- each CSI-RS is parameterized with L offsets and occurs as L CSI-RS occasions. For instance, each CSI-RS may occur L times for aperiodic CSI-RS or may occur L times per period for periodic CSI-RS.
- a method by a UE may include receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the UE may include one or more memories storing processor executable code, and one or more processors coupled with the one or more memories.
- the one or more processors may individually or collectively be operable to execute the code to cause the UE to receive a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, receive a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and transmit an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the UE may include means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code is described.
- the code may include instructions executable by one or more processors to receive a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, receive a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and transmit an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal may be received after the first interval from the first reference signal and receiving, via a second set of channel state information CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal may be received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources and receiving the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving, based on an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal may be received after the first interval from the first reference signal and receiving, based on the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal may be received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- the first interval may be equal to the second interval.
- the first occasion may be within a first threshold duration and the second occasion may be within a second threshold duration.
- the frequency offset may be greater than or equal to a minimum frequency offset value associated with antennas of the UE and may be less than or equal to a maximum frequency offset value associated with the antennas of the UE.
- Some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting information indicating a capability of the UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
- Some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that may be separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration may be equal to the first interval, where at least one of the additional reference signals of the first burst may be received between the first reference signal and the second reference signal and receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that may be separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration may be equal to the second interval, where at least one of the additional reference signals of the second burst may be received between the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal.
- Some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that may be separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration may be equal to the first interval, where the additional reference signals of the first burst may be received before the first reference signal or after the second reference signal and receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that may be separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration may be equal to the second interval, where the additional reference signals of the second burst may be received before the third reference signal or after the fourth reference signal.
- the first reference signal may be associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling may be associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal may be received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
- Some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving a signal indicating a period for receiving the first burst and the second burst, where the first interval or the second interval may be based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
- a method by a network entity may include outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the network entity may include one or more memories storing processor executable code, and one or more processors coupled with the one or more memories.
- the one or more processors may individually or collectively be operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to output a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, output a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and receive an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the network entity may include means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code is described.
- the code may include instructions executable by one or more processors to output a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, output a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and receive an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for outputting, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal may be output after the first interval from the first reference signal and outputting, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal may be output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for outputting the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources and outputting the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal and during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for outputting, in association with an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal may be output after the first interval from the first reference signal and outputting, in association with the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal may be output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- Some examples of the method, network entities, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for obtaining information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
- the first reference signal may be associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling may be associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal may be received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
- Some examples of the method, network entities, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for outputting a signal indicating a period for outputting the first burst and the second burst, where the first interval or the second interval may be based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
- FIG. 1 shows an example of a wireless communications system that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception points (TRPs) in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- TRPs transmission-reception points
- FIG. 2 shows an example of a network architecture that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 3 shows an example of a wireless communications system that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 4 shows examples of timing diagrams that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 5 shows examples of timing diagrams that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 6 shows examples of timing diagrams that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 7 shows an example of a process flow that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIGs. 8 and 9 show block diagrams of devices that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 10 shows a block diagram of a communications manager that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 11 shows a diagram of a system including a device that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIGs. 12 and 13 show block diagrams of devices that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 14 shows a block diagram of a communications manager that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 15 shows a diagram of a system including a device that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIGs. 16 through 19 show flowcharts illustrating methods that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- a network entity may transmit reference signals (e.g., channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) ) to a UE.
- the UE may utilize the reference signals to determine a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) , which may be transmitted to the network entity for use in precoding. Transmitting a full PMI may consume a relatively large amount of resources for communication.
- phase offsets or frequency offsets may be determined by the UE and transmitted to the network entity instead of a full PMI.
- the network entity may utilize the phase offsets or frequency offsets to adjust precoding.
- the UE may measure N CSI-RSs at time t0 (transmitted by N transmission-reception points (TRPs) , for example) and may report the PMI for coherent joint transmission (CJT) . Based on the reported PMI, the network entity may derive an inter-TRP phase offset (s) (by averaging across all ports of a pair of TRPs, for instance) . At time t1, the UE may measure and report one or more inter-TRP phase offsets or frequency offsets. The network entity may apply a precoder for a CJT physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) at time t > t1 based on the phase offset (s) or the frequency offset (s) .
- PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
- TRS tracking reference signal
- a frequency offset accuracy with a 4-symbol time interval under 30 kilohertz (kHz) subcarrier spacing may be about 10 hertz (Hz) (e.g., ⁇ 5 Hz, where a worst case may be doubled as 20 Hz or ⁇ 10 Hz for inter-TRP.
- Hz hertz
- 20 Hz may correspond to a 2 ⁇ phase rotation.
- the accuracy of estimating a phase offset may be limited by noise (e.g., receiver sensitivity) , which may be difficult to improve.
- noise e.g., receiver sensitivity
- the phase offset accuracy may be about 2 ⁇ ⁇ 20 ⁇ ( (4/14) ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ 10-3) ⁇ 1°.
- Some approaches to enhance the phase offset accuracy may include increasing the time interval of the measurement resources.
- increasing a time interval may reduce a maximum measurable un-aliased frequency.
- an inter-TRP frequency offset may be smaller than a TRP-UE frequency difference (for which a TRS may be utilized)
- the time interval may be increased to about 40/6 ⁇ 6.7 ms (e.g., about 13 slots at 30 kHz subcarrier spacing) . Accordingly, a reference signal pattern supporting finer frequency granularity or accuracy measurement may improve frequency offset estimation.
- reference signaling for frequency offset measurement may include N > 1 reference signal bursts, where each reference signal is associated with a quasi co-location (QCL) value (e.g., each burst may correspond to each TRP, and thus N QCL values) .
- QCL quasi co-location
- the time interval may be larger than a threshold (e.g., 10 or 20 slots, or larger than the 4 symbols in 2 slots of a TRS) .
- the time interval may be the same between bursts (e.g., the same for all TRPs) .
- N sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes L CSI-RSs with the same QCL value (e.g., each set corresponds to each burst and each TRP) .
- the first reference signaling arrangement may be utilized with a Type-II Doppler channel measurement resource for the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RSs within a set.
- each set includes N single-port CSI-RSs with N QCL values (e.g., each set may correspond to all TRPs at an occasion group) .
- the second reference signaling arrangement may be utilized with a time domain channel properties (TDCP) channel measurement resource in the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RS sets.
- TDCP time domain channel properties
- each CSI-RS may correspond to each burst and each TRP, thus each having one QCL value
- each CSI-RS is parameterized with L offsets and occurs as L CSI-RS occasions. For instance, each CSI-RS may occur L times for aperiodic CSI-RS or may occur L times per period for periodic CSI-RS.
- aspects of the disclosure are initially described in the context of wireless communications systems. Aspects of the disclosure are additionally described in the context of timing diagrams and a process flow diagram. Aspects of the disclosure are further illustrated by and described with reference to apparatus diagrams, system diagrams, and flowcharts that relate to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs.
- FIG. 1 shows an example of a wireless communications system 100 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the wireless communications system 100 may include one or more devices, such as one or more network devices (e.g., network entities 105) , one or more UEs 115, and a core network 130.
- the wireless communications system 100 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network, an LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) network, an LTE-A Pro network, a New Radio (NR) network, or a network operating in accordance with other systems and radio technologies, including future systems and radio technologies not explicitly mentioned herein.
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- LTE-A LTE-Advanced
- LTE-A Pro LTE-A Pro
- NR New Radio
- the network entities 105 may be dispersed throughout a geographic area to form the wireless communications system 100 and may include devices in different forms or having different capabilities.
- a network entity 105 may be referred to as a network element, a mobility element, a radio access network (RAN) node, or network equipment, among other nomenclature.
- network entities 105 and UEs 115 may wirelessly communicate via communication link (s) 125 (e.g., a radio frequency (RF) access link) .
- a network entity 105 may support a coverage area 110 (e.g., a geographic coverage area) over which the UEs 115 and the network entity 105 may establish the communication link (s) 125.
- the coverage area 110 may be an example of a geographic area over which a network entity 105 and a UE 115 may support the communication of signals according to one or more radio access technologies (RATs) .
- RATs radio access technologies
- the UEs 115 may be dispersed throughout a coverage area 110 of the wireless communications system 100, and each UE 115 may be stationary, or mobile, or both at different times.
- the UEs 115 may be devices in different forms or having different capabilities. Some example UEs 115 are illustrated in FIG. 1.
- the UEs 115 described herein may be capable of supporting communications with various types of devices in the wireless communications system 100 (e.g., other wireless communication devices, including UEs 115 or network entities 105) , as shown in FIG. 1.
- a node of the wireless communications system 100 which may be referred to as a network node, or a wireless node, may be a network entity 105 (e.g., any network entity described herein) , a UE 115 (e.g., any UE described herein) , a network controller, an apparatus, a device, a computing system, one or more components, or another suitable processing entity configured to perform any of the techniques described herein.
- a node may be a UE 115.
- a node may be a network entity 105.
- a first node may be configured to communicate with a second node or a third node.
- the first node may be a UE 115
- the second node may be a network entity 105
- the third node may be a UE 115.
- the first node may be a UE 115
- the second node may be a network entity 105
- the third node may be a network entity 105.
- the first, second, and third nodes may be different relative to these examples.
- reference to a UE 115, network entity 105, apparatus, device, computing system, or the like may include disclosure of the UE 115, network entity 105, apparatus, device, computing system, or the like being a node.
- disclosure that a UE 115 is configured to receive information from a network entity 105 also discloses that a first node is configured to receive information from a second node.
- network entities 105 may communicate with a core network 130, or with one another, or both.
- network entities 105 may communicate with the core network 130 via backhaul communication link (s) 120 (e.g., in accordance with an S1, N2, N3, or other interface protocol) .
- network entities 105 may communicate with one another via backhaul communication link (s) 120 (e.g., in accordance with an X2, Xn, or other interface protocol) either directly (e.g., directly between network entities 105) or indirectly (e.g., via the core network 130) .
- network entities 105 may communicate with one another via a midhaul communication link 162 (e.g., in accordance with a midhaul interface protocol) or a fronthaul communication link 168 (e.g., in accordance with a fronthaul interface protocol) , or any combination thereof.
- the backhaul communication link (s) 120, midhaul communication links 162, or fronthaul communication links 168 may be or include one or more wired links (e.g., an electrical link, an optical fiber link) or one or more wireless links (e.g., a radio link, a wireless optical link) , among other examples or various combinations thereof.
- a UE 115 may communicate with the core network 130 via a communication link 155.
- One or more of the network entities 105 or network equipment described herein may include or may be referred to as a base station 140 (e.g., a base transceiver station, a radio base station, an NR base station, an access point, a radio transceiver, a NodeB, an eNodeB (eNB) , a next-generation NodeB or giga-NodeB (either of which may be referred to as a gNB) , a 5G NB, a next-generation eNB (ng-eNB) , a Home NodeB, a Home eNodeB, or other suitable terminology) .
- a base station 140 e.g., a base transceiver station, a radio base station, an NR base station, an access point, a radio transceiver, a NodeB, an eNodeB (eNB) , a next-generation NodeB or giga-NodeB (either of which may be referred
- a network entity 105 may be implemented in an aggregated (e.g., monolithic, standalone) base station architecture, which may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically integrated within one network entity (e.g., a network entity 105 or a single RAN node, such as a base station 140) .
- a network entity 105 may be implemented in a disaggregated architecture (e.g., a disaggregated base station architecture, a disaggregated RAN architecture) , which may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically distributed among multiple network entities (e.g., network entities 105) , such as an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) network, an open RAN (O-RAN) (e.g., a network configuration sponsored by the O-RAN Alliance) , or a virtualized RAN (vRAN) (e.g., a cloud RAN (C-RAN) ) .
- a disaggregated architecture e.g., a disaggregated base station architecture, a disaggregated RAN architecture
- a protocol stack that is physically or logically distributed among multiple network entities (e.g., network entities 105) , such as an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) network, an open RAN (O-RAN) (e.g., a network configuration sponsored by
- a network entity 105 may include one or more of a central unit (CU) , such as a CU 160, a distributed unit (DU) , such as a DU 165, a radio unit (RU) , such as an RU 170, a RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) , such as an RIC 175 (e.g., a Near-Real Time RIC (Near-RT RIC) , a Non-Real Time RIC (Non-RT RIC) ) , a Service Management and Orchestration (SMO) system, such as an SMO system 180, or any combination thereof.
- a central unit such as a CU 160
- DU distributed unit
- RU such as an RU 170
- a RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) such as an RIC 175
- a Near-Real Time RIC Near-RT RIC
- Non-RT RIC Non-Real Time RIC
- SMO Service Management and Orchestration
- An RU 170 may also be referred to as a radio head, a smart radio head, a remote radio head (RRH) , a remote radio unit (RRU) , or a transmission reception point (TRP) .
- One or more components of the network entities 105 in a disaggregated RAN architecture may be co-located, or one or more components of the network entities 105 may be located in distributed locations (e.g., separate physical locations) .
- one or more of the network entities 105 of a disaggregated RAN architecture may be implemented as virtual units (e.g., a virtual CU (VCU) , a virtual DU (VDU) , a virtual RU (VRU) ) .
- VCU virtual CU
- VDU virtual DU
- VRU virtual RU
- the split of functionality between a CU 160, a DU 165, and an RU 170 is flexible and may support different functionalities depending on which functions (e.g., network layer functions, protocol layer functions, baseband functions, RF functions, or any combinations thereof) are performed at a CU 160, a DU 165, or an RU 170.
- functions e.g., network layer functions, protocol layer functions, baseband functions, RF functions, or any combinations thereof
- a functional split of a protocol stack may be employed between a CU 160 and a DU 165 such that the CU 160 may support one or more layers of the protocol stack and the DU 165 may support one or more different layers of the protocol stack.
- the CU 160 may host upper protocol layer (e.g., layer 3 (L3) , layer 2 (L2) ) functionality and signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) , service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) , Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) ) .
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- SDAP service data adaptation protocol
- PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
- the CU 160 may be connected to a DU 165 (e.g., one or more DUs) or an RU 170 (e.g., one or more RUs) , or some combination thereof, and the DUs 165, RUs 170, or both may host lower protocol layers, such as layer 1 (L1) (e.g., physical (PHY) layer) or L2 (e.g., radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer) functionality and signaling, and may each be at least partially controlled by the CU 160.
- L1 e.g., physical (PHY) layer
- L2 e.g., radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer
- RLC radio link control
- MAC medium access control
- a functional split of the protocol stack may be employed between a DU 165 and an RU 170 such that the DU 165 may support one or more layers of the protocol stack and the RU 170 may support one or more different layers of the protocol stack.
- the DU 165 may support one or multiple different cells (e.g., via one or multiple different RUs, such as an RU 170) .
- a functional split between a CU 160 and a DU 165 or between a DU 165 and an RU 170 may be within a protocol layer (e.g., some functions for a protocol layer may be performed by one of a CU 160, a DU 165, or an RU 170, while other functions of the protocol layer are performed by a different one of the CU 160, the DU 165, or the RU 170) .
- a CU 160 may be functionally split further into CU control plane (CU-CP) and CU user plane (CU-UP) functions.
- CU-CP CU control plane
- CU-UP CU user plane
- a CU 160 may be connected to a DU 165 via a midhaul communication link 162 (e.g., F1, F1-c, F1-u) , and a DU 165 may be connected to an RU 170 via a fronthaul communication link 168 (e.g., open fronthaul (FH) interface) .
- a midhaul communication link 162 or a fronthaul communication link 168 may be implemented in accordance with an interface (e.g., a channel) between layers of a protocol stack supported by respective network entities (e.g., one or more of the network entities 105) that are in communication via such communication links.
- infrastructure and spectral resources for radio access may support wireless backhaul link capabilities to supplement wired backhaul connections, providing an IAB network architecture (e.g., to a core network 130) .
- IAB network architecture e.g., to a core network 130
- one or more of the network entities 105 may be partially controlled by each other.
- the IAB node (s) 104 may be referred to as a donor entity or an IAB donor.
- a DU 165 or an RU 170 may be partially controlled by a CU 160 associated with a network entity 105 or base station 140 (such as a donor network entity or a donor base station) .
- the one or more donor entities may be in communication with one or more additional devices (e.g., IAB node (s) 104) via supported access and backhaul links (e.g., backhaul communication link (s) 120) .
- IAB node (s) 104 may include an IAB mobile termination (IAB-MT) controlled (e.g., scheduled) by one or more DUs (e.g., DUs 165) of a coupled IAB donor.
- IAB-MT IAB mobile termination
- An IAB-MT may be equipped with an independent set of antennas for relay of communications with UEs 115 or may share the same antennas (e.g., of an RU 170) of IAB node (s) 104 used for access via the DU 165 of the IAB node (s) 104 (e.g., referred to as virtual IAB-MT (vIAB-MT) ) .
- the IAB node (s) 104 may include one or more DUs (e.g., DUs 165) that support communication links with additional entities (e.g., IAB node (s) 104, UEs 115) within the relay chain or configuration of the access network (e.g., downstream) .
- one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture e.g., the IAB node (s) 104 or components of the IAB node (s) 104) may be configured to operate according to the techniques described herein.
- an access network (AN) or RAN may include communications between access nodes (e.g., an IAB donor) , IAB node (s) 104, and one or more UEs 115.
- the IAB donor may facilitate connection between the core network 130 and the AN (e.g., via a wired or wireless connection to the core network 130) . That is, an IAB donor may refer to a RAN node with a wired or wireless connection to the core network 130.
- the IAB donor may include one or more of a CU 160, a DU 165, and an RU 170, in which case the CU 160 may communicate with the core network 130 via an interface (e.g., a backhaul link) .
- the IAB donor and IAB node (s) 104 may communicate via an F1 interface according to a protocol that defines signaling messages (e.g., an F1 AP protocol) .
- the CU 160 may communicate with the core network 130 via an interface, which may be an example of a portion of a backhaul link, and may communicate with other CUs (e.g., including a CU 160 associated with an alternative IAB donor) via an Xn-C interface, which may be an example of another portion of a backhaul link.
- IAB node (s) 104 may refer to RAN nodes that provide IAB functionality (e.g., access for UEs 115, wireless self-backhauling capabilities) .
- a DU 165 may act as a distributed scheduling node towards child nodes associated with the IAB node (s) 104, and the IAB-MT may act as a scheduled node towards parent nodes associated with IAB node (s) 104. That is, an IAB donor may be referred to as a parent node in communication with one or more child nodes (e.g., an IAB donor may relay transmissions for UEs through other IAB node (s) 104) .
- IAB node (s) 104 may also be referred to as parent nodes or child nodes to other IAB node (s) 104, depending on the relay chain or configuration of the AN.
- the IAB-MT entity of IAB node (s) 104 may provide a Uu interface for a child IAB node (e.g., the IAB node (s) 104) to receive signaling from a parent IAB node (e.g., the IAB node (s) 104) , and a DU interface (e.g., a DU 165) may provide a Uu interface for a parent IAB node to signal to a child IAB node or UE 115.
- a DU interface e.g., a DU 165
- IAB node (s) 104 may be referred to as parent nodes that support communications for child IAB nodes, or may be referred to as child IAB nodes associated with IAB donors, or both.
- An IAB donor may include a CU 160 with a wired or wireless connection (e.g., backhaul communication link (s) 120) to the core network 130 and may act as a parent node to IAB node (s) 104.
- the DU 165 of an IAB donor may relay transmissions to UEs 115 through IAB node (s) 104, or may directly signal transmissions to a UE 115, or both.
- the CU 160 of the IAB donor may signal communication link establishment via an F1 interface to IAB node (s) 104, and the IAB node (s) 104 may schedule transmissions (e.g., transmissions to the UEs 115 relayed from the IAB donor) through one or more DUs (e.g., DUs 165) . That is, data may be relayed to and from IAB node (s) 104 via signaling via an NR Uu interface to MT of IAB node (s) 104 (e.g., other IAB node (s) ) . Communications with IAB node (s) 104 may be scheduled by a DU 165 of the IAB donor or of IAB node (s) 104.
- DUs e.g., DUs 165
- one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture may be configured to support test as described herein.
- some operations described as being performed by a UE 115 or a network entity 105 may additionally, or alternatively, be performed by one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture (e.g., components such as an IAB node, a DU 165, a CU 160, an RU 170, an RIC 175, an SMO system 180) .
- a UE 115 may include or may be referred to as a mobile device, a wireless device, a remote device, a handheld device, or a subscriber device, or some other suitable terminology, where the “device” may also be referred to as a unit, a station, a terminal, or a client, among other examples.
- a UE 115 may also include or may be referred to as a personal electronic device such as a cellular phone, a personal digital assistant (PDA) , a tablet computer, a laptop computer, or a personal computer.
- PDA personal digital assistant
- a UE 115 may include or be referred to as a wireless local loop (WLL) station, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, an Internet of Everything (IoE) device, or a machine type communications (MTC) device, among other examples, which may be implemented in various objects such as appliances, vehicles, or meters, among other examples.
- WLL wireless local loop
- IoT Internet of Things
- IoE Internet of Everything
- MTC machine type communications
- the UEs 115 described herein may be able to communicate with various types of devices, such as UEs 115 that may sometimes operate as relays, as well as the network entities 105 and the network equipment including macro eNBs or gNBs, small cell eNBs or gNBs, or relay base stations, among other examples, as shown in FIG. 1.
- devices such as UEs 115 that may sometimes operate as relays, as well as the network entities 105 and the network equipment including macro eNBs or gNBs, small cell eNBs or gNBs, or relay base stations, among other examples, as shown in FIG. 1.
- the UEs 115 and the network entities 105 may wirelessly communicate with one another via the communication link (s) 125 (e.g., one or more access links) using resources associated with one or more carriers.
- the term “carrier” may refer to a set of RF spectrum resources having a defined PHY layer structure for supporting the communication link (s) 125.
- a carrier used for the communication link (s) 125 may include a portion of an RF spectrum band (e.g., a bandwidth part (BWP) ) that is operated according to one or more PHY layer channels for a given RAT (e.g., LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, NR) .
- a given RAT e.g., LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, NR
- Each PHY layer channel may carry acquisition signaling (e.g., synchronization signals, system information) , control signaling that coordinates operation for the carrier, user data, or other signaling.
- the wireless communications system 100 may support communication with a UE 115 using carrier aggregation or multi-carrier operation.
- a UE 115 may be configured with multiple downlink component carriers and one or more uplink component carriers according to a carrier aggregation configuration.
- Carrier aggregation may be used with both frequency division duplexing (FDD) and time division duplexing (TDD) component carriers.
- Communication between a network entity 105 and other devices may refer to communication between the devices and any portion (e.g., entity, sub-entity) of a network entity 105.
- the terms “transmitting, ” “receiving, ” or “communicating, ” when referring to a network entity 105 may refer to any portion of a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, a CU 160, a DU 165, a RU 170) of a RAN communicating with another device (e.g., directly or via one or more other network entities, such as one or more of the network entities 105) .
- a network entity 105 e.g., a base station 140, a CU 160, a DU 165, a RU 170
- another device e.g., directly or via one or more other network entities, such as one or more of the network entities 105
- a carrier may have acquisition signaling or control signaling that coordinates operations for other carriers.
- a carrier may be associated with a frequency channel (e.g., an evolved universal mobile telecommunication system terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) absolute RF channel number (EARFCN) ) and may be identified according to a channel raster for discovery by the UEs 115.
- E-UTRA evolved universal mobile telecommunication system terrestrial radio access
- a carrier may be operated in a standalone mode, in which case initial acquisition and connection may be conducted by the UEs 115 via the carrier, or the carrier may be operated in a non-standalone mode, in which case a connection is anchored using a different carrier (e.g., of the same or a different RAT) .
- the communication link (s) 125 of the wireless communications system 100 may include downlink transmissions (e.g., forward link transmissions) from a network entity 105 to a UE 115, uplink transmissions (e.g., return link transmissions) from a UE 115 to a network entity 105, or both, among other configurations of transmissions.
- Carriers may carry downlink or uplink communications (e.g., in an FDD mode) or may be configured to carry downlink and uplink communications (e.g., in a TDD mode) .
- a carrier may be associated with a particular bandwidth of the RF spectrum and, in some examples, the carrier bandwidth may be referred to as a “system bandwidth” of the carrier or the wireless communications system 100.
- the carrier bandwidth may be one of a set of bandwidths for carriers of a particular RAT (e.g., 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 40, or 80 megahertz (MHz) ) .
- Devices of the wireless communications system 100 e.g., the network entities 105, the UEs 115, or both
- the wireless communications system 100 may include network entities 105 or UEs 115 that support concurrent communications using carriers associated with multiple carrier bandwidths.
- each served UE 115 may be configured for operating using portions (e.g., a sub-band, a BWP) or all of a carrier bandwidth.
- Signal waveforms transmitted via a carrier may be made up of multiple subcarriers (e.g., using multi-carrier modulation (MCM) techniques such as orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) or discrete Fourier transform spread OFDM (DFT-S-OFDM) ) .
- MCM multi-carrier modulation
- OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
- DFT-S-OFDM discrete Fourier transform spread OFDM
- a resource element may refer to resources of one symbol period (e.g., a duration of one modulation symbol) and one subcarrier, in which case the symbol period and subcarrier spacing may be inversely related.
- the quantity of bits carried by each resource element may depend on the modulation scheme (e.g., the order of the modulation scheme, the coding rate of the modulation scheme, or both) , such that a relatively higher quantity of resource elements (e.g., in a transmission duration) and a relatively higher order of a modulation scheme may correspond to a relatively higher rate of communication.
- a wireless communications resource may refer to a combination of an RF spectrum resource, a time resource, and a spatial resource (e.g., a spatial layer, a beam) , and the use of multiple spatial resources may increase the data rate or data integrity for communications with a UE 115.
- One or more numerologies for a carrier may be supported, and a numerology may include a subcarrier spacing ( ⁇ f) and a cyclic prefix.
- a carrier may be divided into one or more BWPs having the same or different numerologies.
- a UE 115 may be configured with multiple BWPs.
- a single BWP for a carrier may be active at a given time and communications for the UE 115 may be restricted to one or more active BWPs.
- Time intervals of a communications resource may be organized according to radio frames each having a specified duration (e.g., 10 milliseconds (ms) ) .
- Each radio frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN) (e.g., ranging from 0 to 1023) .
- SFN system frame number
- Each frame may include multiple consecutively-numbered subframes or slots, and each subframe or slot may have the same duration.
- a frame may be divided (e.g., in the time domain) into subframes, and each subframe may be further divided into a quantity of slots.
- each frame may include a variable quantity of slots, and the quantity of slots may depend on subcarrier spacing.
- Each slot may include a quantity of symbol periods (e.g., depending on the length of the cyclic prefix prepended to each symbol period) .
- a slot may further be divided into multiple mini-slots associated with one or more symbols. Excluding the cyclic prefix, each symbol period may be associated with one or more (e.g., N f ) sampling periods. The duration of a symbol period may depend on the subcarrier spacing or frequency band of operation.
- a subframe, a slot, a mini-slot, or a symbol may be the smallest scheduling unit (e.g., in the time domain) of the wireless communications system 100 and may be referred to as a transmission time interval (TTI) .
- TTI duration e.g., a quantity of symbol periods in a TTI
- the smallest scheduling unit of the wireless communications system 100 may be dynamically selected (e.g., in bursts of shortened TTIs (sTTIs) ) .
- Physical channels may be multiplexed for communication using a carrier according to various techniques.
- a physical control channel and a physical data channel may be multiplexed for signaling via a downlink carrier, for example, using one or more of time division multiplexing (TDM) techniques, frequency division multiplexing (FDM) techniques, or hybrid TDM-FDM techniques.
- a control region e.g., a control resource set (CORESET)
- CORESET control resource set
- One or more control regions may be configured for a set of the UEs 115.
- one or more of the UEs 115 may monitor or search control regions for control information according to one or more search space sets, and each search space set may include one or multiple control channel candidates in one or more aggregation levels arranged in a cascaded manner.
- An aggregation level for a control channel candidate may refer to an amount of control channel resources (e.g., control channel elements (CCEs) ) associated with encoded information for a control information format having a given payload size.
- Search space sets may include common search space sets configured for sending control information to UEs 115 (e.g., one or more UEs) or may include UE-specific search space sets for sending control information to a UE 115 (e.g., a specific UE) .
- a network entity 105 may provide communication coverage via one or more cells, for example a macro cell, a small cell, a hot spot, or other types of cells, or any combination thereof.
- the term “cell” may refer to a logical communication entity used for communication with a network entity 105 (e.g., using a carrier) and may be associated with an identifier for distinguishing neighboring cells (e.g., a physical cell identifier (PCID) , a virtual cell identifier (VCID) ) .
- a cell also may refer to a coverage area 110 or a portion of a coverage area 110 (e.g., a sector) over which the logical communication entity operates.
- Such cells may range from smaller areas (e.g., a structure, a subset of structure) to larger areas depending on various factors such as the capabilities of the network entity 105.
- a cell may be or include a building, a subset of a building, or exterior spaces between or overlapping with coverage areas 110, among other examples.
- a macro cell generally covers a relatively large geographic area (e.g., several kilometers in radius) and may allow unrestricted access by the UEs 115 with service subscriptions with the network provider supporting the macro cell.
- a small cell may be associated with a network entity 105 operating with lower power (e.g., a base station 140 operating with lower power) relative to a macro cell, and a small cell may operate using the same or different (e.g., licensed, unlicensed) frequency bands as macro cells.
- Small cells may provide unrestricted access to the UEs 115 with service subscriptions with the network provider or may provide restricted access to the UEs 115 having an association with the small cell (e.g., the UEs 115 in a closed subscriber group (CSG) , the UEs 115 associated with users in a home or office) .
- a network entity 105 may support one or more cells and may also support communications via the one or more cells using one or multiple component carriers.
- a carrier may support multiple cells, and different cells may be configured according to different protocol types (e.g., MTC, narrowband IoT (NB-IoT) , enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB) ) that may provide access for different types of devices.
- protocol types e.g., MTC, narrowband IoT (NB-IoT) , enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB)
- NB-IoT narrowband IoT
- eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
- a network entity 105 may be movable and therefore provide communication coverage for a moving coverage area, such as the coverage area 110.
- coverage areas 110 e.g., different coverage areas
- coverage areas 110 may overlap, but the coverage areas 110 (e.g., different coverage areas) may be supported by the same network entity (e.g., a network entity 105) .
- overlapping coverage areas, such as a coverage area 110, associated with different technologies may be supported by different network entities (e.g., the network entities 105) .
- the wireless communications system 100 may include, for example, a heterogeneous network in which different types of the network entities 105 support communications for coverage areas 110 (e.g., different coverage areas) using the same or different RATs.
- the wireless communications system 100 may support synchronous or asynchronous operation.
- network entities 105 e.g., base stations 140
- network entities 105 may have different frame timings, and transmissions from different network entities (e.g., different ones of network entities 105) may, in some examples, not be aligned in time.
- the techniques described herein may be used for either synchronous or asynchronous operations.
- Some UEs 115 may be relatively low cost or low complexity devices and may provide for automated communication between machines (e.g., via Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communication) .
- M2M communication or MTC may refer to data communication technologies that allow devices to communicate with one another or a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140) without human intervention.
- M2M communication or MTC may include communications from devices that integrate sensors or meters to measure or capture information and relay such information to a central server or application program that uses the information or presents the information to humans interacting with the application program.
- Some UEs 115 may be designed to collect information or enable automated behavior of machines or other devices. Examples of applications for MTC devices include smart metering, inventory monitoring, water level monitoring, equipment monitoring, healthcare monitoring, wildlife monitoring, weather and geological event monitoring, fleet management and tracking, remote security sensing, physical access control, and transaction-based business charging.
- Some UEs 115 may be configured to employ operating modes that reduce power consumption, such as half-duplex communications (e.g., a mode that supports one-way communication via transmission or reception, but not transmission and reception concurrently) .
- half-duplex communications may be performed at a reduced peak rate.
- Other power conservation techniques for the UEs 115 may include entering a power saving deep sleep mode when not engaging in active communications, operating using a limited bandwidth (e.g., according to narrowband communications) , or a combination of these techniques.
- some UEs 115 may be configured for operation using a narrowband protocol type that is associated with a defined portion or range (e.g., set of subcarriers or resource blocks (RBs) ) within a carrier, within a guard-band of a carrier, or outside of a carrier.
- a narrowband protocol type that is associated with a defined portion or range (e.g., set of subcarriers or resource blocks (RBs) ) within a carrier, within a guard-band of a carrier, or outside of a carrier.
- the wireless communications system 100 may be configured to support ultra-reliable communications or low-latency communications, or various combinations thereof.
- the wireless communications system 100 may be configured to support ultra-reliable low-latency communications (URLLC) .
- the UEs 115 may be designed to support ultra-reliable, low-latency, or critical functions.
- Ultra-reliable communications may include private communication or group communication and may be supported by one or more services such as push-to-talk, video, or data.
- Support for ultra-reliable, low-latency functions may include prioritization of services, and such services may be used for public safety or general commercial applications.
- the terms ultra-reliable, low-latency, and ultra-reliable low-latency may be used interchangeably herein.
- a UE 115 may be configured to support communicating directly with other UEs (e.g., one or more of the UEs 115) via a device-to-device (D2D) communication link, such as a D2D communication link 135 (e.g., in accordance with a peer-to-peer (P2P) , D2D, or sidelink protocol) .
- D2D device-to-device
- P2P peer-to-peer
- one or more UEs 115 of a group that are performing D2D communications may be within the coverage area 110 of a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) , which may support aspects of such D2D communications being configured by (e.g., scheduled by) the network entity 105.
- one or more UEs 115 of such a group may be outside the coverage area 110 of a network entity 105 or may be otherwise unable to or not configured to receive transmissions from a network entity 105.
- groups of the UEs 115 communicating via D2D communications may support a one-to-many (1: M) system in which each UE 115 transmits to one or more of the UEs 115 in the group.
- a network entity 105 may facilitate the scheduling of resources for D2D communications.
- D2D communications may be carried out between the UEs 115 without an involvement of a network entity 105.
- a D2D communication link 135 may be an example of a communication channel, such as a sidelink communication channel, between vehicles (e.g., UEs 115) .
- vehicles may communicate using vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communications, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communications, or some combination of these.
- V2X vehicle-to-everything
- V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
- a vehicle may signal information related to traffic conditions, signal scheduling, weather, safety, emergencies, or any other information relevant to a V2X system.
- vehicles in a V2X system may communicate with roadside infrastructure, such as roadside units, or with the network via one or more network nodes (e.g., network entities 105, base stations 140, RUs 170) using vehicle-to-network (V2N) communications, or with both.
- roadside infrastructure such as roadside units
- network nodes e.g., network entities 105, base stations 140, RUs 170
- V2N vehicle-to-network
- the core network 130 may provide user authentication, access authorization, tracking, Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity, and other access, routing, or mobility functions.
- the core network 130 may be an evolved packet core (EPC) or 5G core (5GC) , which may include at least one control plane entity that manages access and mobility (e.g., a mobility management entity (MME) , an access and mobility management function (AMF) ) and at least one user plane entity that routes packets or interconnects to external networks (e.g., a serving gateway (S-GW) , a Packet Data Network (PDN) gateway (P-GW) , or a user plane function (UPF) ) .
- EPC evolved packet core
- 5GC 5G core
- MME mobility management entity
- AMF access and mobility management function
- S-GW serving gateway
- PDN Packet Data Network gateway
- UPF user plane function
- the control plane entity may manage non-access stratum (NAS) functions such as mobility, authentication, and bearer management for the UEs 115 served by the network entities 105 (e.g., base stations 140) associated with the core network 130.
- NAS non-access stratum
- User IP packets may be transferred through the user plane entity, which may provide IP address allocation as well as other functions.
- the user plane entity may be connected to IP services 150 for one or more network operators.
- the IP services 150 may include access to the Internet, Intranet (s) , an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) , or a Packet-Switched Streaming Service.
- IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem
- the wireless communications system 100 may operate using one or more frequency bands, which may be in the range of 300 megahertz (MHz) to 300 gigahertz (GHz) .
- the region from 300 MHz to 3 GHz is known as the ultra-high frequency (UHF) region or decimeter band because the wavelengths range from approximately one decimeter to one meter in length.
- UHF waves may be blocked or redirected by buildings and environmental features, which may be referred to as clusters, but the waves may penetrate structures sufficiently for a macro cell to provide service to the UEs 115 located indoors. Communications using UHF waves may be associated with smaller antennas and shorter ranges (e.g., less than one hundred kilometers) compared to communications using the smaller frequencies and longer waves of the high frequency (HF) or very high frequency (VHF) portion of the spectrum below 300 MHz.
- HF high frequency
- VHF very high frequency
- the wireless communications system 100 may also operate using a super high frequency (SHF) region, which may be in the range of 3 GHz to 30 GHz, also known as the centimeter band, or using an extremely high frequency (EHF) region of the spectrum (e.g., from 30 GHz to 300 GHz) , also known as the millimeter band.
- SHF super high frequency
- EHF extremely high frequency
- the wireless communications system 100 may support millimeter wave (mmW) communications between the UEs 115 and the network entities 105 (e.g., base stations 140, RUs 170) , and EHF antennas of the respective devices may be smaller and more closely spaced than UHF antennas.
- mmW millimeter wave
- such techniques may facilitate using antenna arrays within a device.
- EHF transmissions may be subject to even greater attenuation and shorter range than SHF or UHF transmissions.
- the techniques disclosed herein may be employed across transmissions that use one or more different frequency regions, and designated use of bands across these frequency regions may differ by country or regulating body.
- the wireless communications system 100 may utilize both licensed and unlicensed RF spectrum bands.
- the wireless communications system 100 may employ License Assisted Access (LAA) , LTE-Unlicensed (LTE-U) RAT, or NR technology using an unlicensed band such as the 5 GHz industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) band.
- LAA License Assisted Access
- LTE-U LTE-Unlicensed
- NR NR technology
- an unlicensed band such as the 5 GHz industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) band.
- devices such as the network entities 105 and the UEs 115 may employ carrier sensing for collision detection and avoidance.
- operations using unlicensed bands may be based on a carrier aggregation configuration in conjunction with component carriers operating using a licensed band (e.g., LAA) .
- Operations using unlicensed spectrum may include downlink transmissions, uplink transmissions, P2P transmissions, or D2D transmissions, among other examples.
- a network entity 105 e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170
- a UE 115 may be equipped with multiple antennas, which may be used to employ techniques such as transmit diversity, receive diversity, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communications, or beamforming.
- the antennas of a network entity 105 or a UE 115 may be located within one or more antenna arrays or antenna panels, which may support MIMO operations or transmit or receive beamforming.
- one or more base station antennas or antenna arrays may be co-located at an antenna assembly, such as an antenna tower.
- antennas or antenna arrays associated with a network entity 105 may be located at diverse geographic locations.
- a network entity 105 may include an antenna array with a set of rows and columns of antenna ports that the network entity 105 may use to support beamforming of communications with a UE 115.
- a UE 115 may include one or more antenna arrays that may support various MIMO or beamforming operations.
- an antenna panel may support RF beamforming for a signal transmitted via an antenna port.
- the network entities 105 or the UEs 115 may use MIMO communications to exploit multipath signal propagation and increase spectral efficiency by transmitting or receiving multiple signals via different spatial layers.
- Such techniques may be referred to as spatial multiplexing.
- the multiple signals may, for example, be transmitted by the transmitting device via different antennas or different combinations of antennas. Likewise, the multiple signals may be received by the receiving device via different antennas or different combinations of antennas.
- Each of the multiple signals may be referred to as a separate spatial stream and may carry information associated with the same data stream (e.g., the same codeword) or different data streams (e.g., different codewords) .
- Different spatial layers may be associated with different antenna ports used for channel measurement and reporting.
- MIMO techniques include single-user MIMO (SU-MIMO) , for which multiple spatial layers are transmitted to the same receiving device, and multiple-user MIMO (MU-MIMO) , for which multiple spatial layers are transmitted to multiple devices.
- SU-MIMO single-user MIMO
- Beamforming which may also be referred to as spatial filtering, directional transmission, or directional reception, is a signal processing technique that may be used at a transmitting device or a receiving device (e.g., a network entity 105, a UE 115) to shape or steer an antenna beam (e.g., a transmit beam, a receive beam) along a spatial path between the transmitting device and the receiving device.
- Beamforming may be achieved by combining the signals communicated via antenna elements of an antenna array such that some signals propagating along particular orientations with respect to an antenna array experience constructive interference while others experience destructive interference.
- the adjustment of signals communicated via the antenna elements may include a transmitting device or a receiving device applying amplitude offsets, phase offsets, or both to signals carried via the antenna elements associated with the device.
- the adjustments associated with each of the antenna elements may be defined by a beamforming weight set associated with a particular orientation (e.g., with respect to the antenna array of the transmitting device or receiving device, or with respect to some other orientation) .
- a network entity 105 or a UE 115 may use beam sweeping techniques as part of beamforming operations.
- a network entity 105 e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170
- Some signals e.g., synchronization signals, reference signals, beam selection signals, or other control signals
- the network entity 105 may transmit a signal according to different beamforming weight sets associated with different directions of transmission.
- Transmissions along different beam directions may be used to identify (e.g., by a transmitting device, such as a network entity 105, or by a receiving device, such as a UE 115) a beam direction for later transmission or reception by the network entity 105.
- a transmitting device such as a network entity 105
- a receiving device such as a UE 115
- Some signals may be transmitted by a transmitting device (e.g., a network entity 105 or a UE 115) along a single beam direction (e.g., a direction associated with the receiving device, such as another network entity 105 or UE 115) .
- a transmitting device e.g., a network entity 105 or a UE 115
- a single beam direction e.g., a direction associated with the receiving device, such as another network entity 105 or UE 115
- the beam direction associated with transmissions along a single beam direction may be determined based on a signal that was transmitted along one or more beam directions.
- a UE 115 may receive one or more of the signals transmitted by the network entity 105 along different directions and may report to the network entity 105 an indication of the signal that the UE 115 received with a highest signal quality or an otherwise acceptable signal quality.
- transmissions by a device may be performed using multiple beam directions, and the device may use a combination of digital precoding or beamforming to generate a combined beam for transmission (e.g., from a network entity 105 to a UE 115) .
- the UE 115 may report feedback that indicates precoding weights for one or more beam directions, and the feedback may correspond to a configured set of beams across a system bandwidth or one or more sub-bands.
- the network entity 105 may transmit a reference signal (e.g., a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) , a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) ) , which may be precoded or unprecoded.
- a reference signal e.g., a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) , a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS)
- the UE 115 may provide feedback for beam selection, which may be a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) or codebook-based feedback (e.g., a multi-panel type codebook, a linear combination type codebook, a port selection type codebook) .
- PMI precoding matrix indicator
- codebook-based feedback e.g., a multi-panel type codebook, a linear combination type codebook, a port selection type codebook
- these techniques are described with reference to signals transmitted along one or more directions by a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170)
- a UE 115 may employ similar techniques for transmitting signals multiple times along different directions (e.g., for identifying a beam direction for subsequent transmission or reception by the UE 115) or for transmitting a signal along a single direction (e.g., for transmitting data to a receiving device) .
- a receiving device may perform reception operations in accordance with multiple receive configurations (e.g., directional listening) when receiving various signals from a transmitting device (e.g., a network entity 105) , such as synchronization signals, reference signals, beam selection signals, or other control signals.
- a transmitting device e.g., a network entity 105
- a receiving device may perform reception in accordance with multiple receive directions by receiving via different antenna subarrays, by processing received signals according to different antenna subarrays, by receiving according to different receive beamforming weight sets (e.g., different directional listening weight sets) applied to signals received at multiple antenna elements of an antenna array, or by processing received signals according to different receive beamforming weight sets applied to signals received at multiple antenna elements of an antenna array, any of which may be referred to as “listening” according to different receive configurations or receive directions.
- a receiving device may use a single receive configuration to receive along a single beam direction (e.g., when receiving a data signal) .
- the single receive configuration may be aligned along a beam direction determined based on listening according to different receive configuration directions (e.g., a beam direction determined to have a highest signal strength, highest signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) , or otherwise acceptable signal quality based on listening according to multiple beam directions) .
- receive configuration directions e.g., a beam direction determined to have a highest signal strength, highest signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) , or otherwise acceptable signal quality based on listening according to multiple beam directions
- the wireless communications system 100 may be a packet-based network that operates according to a layered protocol stack.
- communications at the bearer or PDCP layer may be IP-based.
- An RLC layer may perform packet segmentation and reassembly to communicate via logical channels.
- a MAC layer may perform priority handling and multiplexing of logical channels into transport channels.
- the MAC layer also may implement error detection techniques, error correction techniques, or both to support retransmissions to improve link efficiency.
- an RRC layer may provide establishment, configuration, and maintenance of an RRC connection between a UE 115 and a network entity 105 or a core network 130 supporting radio bearers for user plane data.
- a PHY layer may map transport channels to physical channels.
- the UEs 115 and the network entities 105 may support retransmissions of data to increase the likelihood that data is received successfully.
- Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedback is one technique for increasing the likelihood that data is received correctly via a communication link (e.g., the communication link (s) 125, a D2D communication link 135) .
- HARQ may include a combination of error detection (e.g., using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) ) , forward error correction (FEC) , and retransmission (e.g., automatic repeat request (ARQ) ) .
- FEC forward error correction
- ARQ automatic repeat request
- HARQ may improve throughput at the MAC layer in relatively poor radio conditions (e.g., low signal-to-noise conditions) .
- a device may support same-slot HARQ feedback, in which case the device may provide HARQ feedback in a specific slot for data received via a previous symbol in the slot. In some other examples, the device may provide HARQ feedback in a subsequent slot, or according to some other time interval.
- Some wireless communications systems perform MIMO communications.
- precoding may be performed to communicate data streams via multiple layers or to control beamforming.
- a network entity 105 may transmit reference signals (e.g., CSI-RSs) to a UE 115.
- the UE 115 may utilize the reference signals to determine a PMI, which may be transmitted to the network entity 105 for use in precoding. Transmitting a full PMI may consume a relatively large amount of resources for communication.
- phase offsets or frequency offsets may be determined by the UE 115 and transmitted to the network entity 105 instead of a full PMI.
- the network entity 105 may utilize the phase offsets or frequency offsets to adjust precoding.
- the UE 115 may measure N CSI-RSs at time t0 (transmitted by N TRPs, for example) and may report the PMI for CJT. Based on the reported PMI, the network entity 105 may derive an inter-TRP phase offset (s) (by averaging across all ports of a pair of TRPs, for instance) . At time t1, the UE 115 may measure and report one or more inter-TRP phase offsets or frequency offsets. The network entity 105 may apply a precoder for a CJT PDSCH at time t > t1 based on the phase offset (s) or the frequency offset (s) .
- a frequency offset accuracy with a 4-symbol time interval under 30 kilohertz (kHz) subcarrier spacing may be about 10 Hz (e.g., ⁇ 5 Hz, where a worst case may be doubled as 20 Hz or ⁇ 10 Hz for inter-TRP. In 50 ms, 20 Hz may correspond to a 2 ⁇ phase rotation.
- the accuracy of estimating a phase offset may be limited by noise (e.g., receiver sensitivity) , which may be difficult to improve.
- noise e.g., receiver sensitivity
- the phase offset accuracy may be about 2 ⁇ ⁇ 20 ⁇ ( (4/14) ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ 10-3) ⁇ 1°.
- Some approaches to enhance the phase offset accuracy may include increasing the time interval of the measurement resources.
- a longer time interval may lower a maximum measurable un-aliased frequency.
- the time interval may be increased to about 40/6 ⁇ 6.7 ms (e.g., about 13 slots at 30 kHz subcarrier spacing) . Accordingly, a reference signal pattern supporting finer frequency granularity or accuracy measurement may improve frequency offset estimation.
- reference signaling for frequency offset measurement may include N > 1 reference signal bursts, where each reference signal is associated with a QCL value (e.g., each burst may correspond to each TRP, and thus N QCL values) .
- the time interval may be larger than a threshold (e.g., 10 or 20 slots, or larger than the 4 symbols in 2 slots of a TRS) .
- the time interval may be the same between bursts (e.g., the same for all TRPs) .
- N sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes L CSI-RSs with the same QCL value (e.g., each set corresponds to each burst and each TRP) .
- the first reference signaling arrangement may be utilized with a Type-II Doppler channel measurement resource for the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RSs within a set.
- each set includes N single-port CSI-RSs with N QCL values (e.g., each set may correspond to all TRPs at an occasion group) .
- the second reference signaling arrangement may be utilized with a TDCP channel measurement resource in the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RS sets.
- each CSI-RS may correspond to each burst and each TRP, thus each having one QCL value
- each CSI-RS is parameterized with L offsets and occurs as L CSI-RS occasions. For instance, each CSI-RS may occur L times for aperiodic CSI-RS or may occur L times per period for periodic CSI-RS.
- FIG. 2 shows an example of a network architecture 200 (e.g., a disaggregated base station architecture, a disaggregated RAN architecture) that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the network architecture 200 may illustrate an example for implementing one or more aspects of the wireless communications system 100.
- the network architecture 200 may include one or more CUs 160-a that may communicate directly with a core network 130-a via a backhaul communication link 120-a, or indirectly with the core network 130-a through one or more disaggregated network entities 105 (e.g., a Near-RT RIC 175-b via an E2 link, or a Non-RT RIC 175-aassociated with an SMO 180-a (e.g., an SMO Framework) , or both) .
- a CU 160-a may communicate with one or more DUs 165-a via respective midhaul communication links 162-a (e.g., an F1 interface) .
- the DUs 165-a may communicate with one or more RUs 170-a via respective fronthaul communication links 168-a.
- the RUs 170-a may be associated with respective coverage areas 110-a and may communicate with UEs 115-avia one or more communication links 125-a.
- a UE 115-a may be simultaneously served by multiple RUs 170-a.
- Each of the network entities 105 of the network architecture 200 may include one or more interfaces or may be coupled with one or more interfaces configured to receive or transmit signals (e.g., data, information) via a wired or wireless transmission medium.
- Each network entity 105, or an associated processor (e.g., controller) providing instructions to an interface of the network entity 105 may be configured to communicate with one or more of the other network entities 105 via the transmission medium.
- the network entities 105 may include a wired interface configured to receive or transmit signals over a wired transmission medium to one or more of the other network entities 105.
- the network entities 105 may include a wireless interface, which may include a receiver, a transmitter, or transceiver (e.g., an RF transceiver) configured to receive or transmit signals, or both, over a wireless transmission medium to one or more of the other network entities 105.
- a wireless interface which may include a receiver, a transmitter, or transceiver (e.g., an RF transceiver) configured to receive or transmit signals, or both, over a wireless transmission medium to one or more of the other network entities 105.
- a CU 160-a may host one or more higher layer control functions. Such control functions may include RRC, PDCP, SDAP, or the like. Each control function may be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other control functions hosted by the CU 160-a.
- a CU 160-a may be configured to handle user plane functionality (e.g., CU-UP) , control plane functionality (e.g., CU-CP) , or a combination thereof.
- a CU 160-a may be logically split into one or more CU-UP units and one or more CU-CP units.
- a CU-UP unit may communicate bidirectionally with the CU-CP unit via an interface, such as an E1 interface when implemented in an O-RAN configuration.
- a CU 160-a may be implemented to communicate with a DU 165-a, as necessary, for network control and signaling.
- a DU 165-a may correspond to a logical unit that includes one or more functions (e.g., base station functions, RAN functions) to control the operation of one or more RUs 170-a.
- a DU 165-a may host, at least partially, one or more of an RLC layer, a MAC layer, and one or more aspects of a PHY layer (e.g., a high PHY layer, such as modules for FEC encoding and decoding, scrambling, modulation and demodulation, or the like) depending, at least in part, on a functional split, such as those defined by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) .
- a DU 165-a may further host one or more low PHY layers. Each layer may be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other layers hosted by the DU 165-a, or with control functions hosted by a CU 160-a.
- lower-layer functionality may be implemented by one or more RUs 170-a.
- an RU 170-a controlled by a DU 165-a, may correspond to a logical node that hosts RF processing functions, or low-PHY layer functions (e.g., performing fast Fourier transform (FFT) , inverse FFT (iFFT) , digital beamforming, physical random access channel (PRACH) extraction and filtering, or the like) , or both, based at least in part on the functional split, such as a lower-layer functional split.
- FFT fast Fourier transform
- iFFT inverse FFT
- PRACH physical random access channel extraction and filtering, or the like
- an RU 170-a may be implemented to handle over the air (OTA) communication with one or more UEs 115-a.
- OTA over the air
- real-time and non-real-time aspects of control and user plane communication with the RU (s) 170-a may be controlled by the corresponding DU 165-a.
- a configuration may enable a DU 165-a and a CU 160-a to be implemented in a cloud-based RAN architecture, such as a vRAN architecture.
- the SMO 180-a may be configured to support RAN deployment and provisioning of non-virtualized and virtualized network entities 105.
- the SMO 180-a may be configured to support the deployment of dedicated physical resources for RAN coverage requirements which may be managed via an operations and maintenance interface (e.g., an O1 interface) .
- the SMO 180-a may be configured to interact with a cloud computing platform (e.g., an O-Cloud 205) to perform network entity life cycle management (e.g., to instantiate virtualized network entities 105) via a cloud computing platform interface (e.g., an O2 interface) .
- a cloud computing platform e.g., an O-Cloud 205
- network entity life cycle management e.g., to instantiate virtualized network entities 105
- a cloud computing platform interface e.g., an O2 interface
- Such virtualized network entities 105 can include, but are not limited to, CUs 160-a, DUs 165-a, RUs 170-a, and Near-RT RICs 175-b.
- the SMO 180-a may communicate with components configured in accordance with a 4G RAN (e.g., via an O1 interface) . Additionally, or alternatively, in some implementations, the SMO 180-a may communicate directly with one or more RUs 170-a via an O1 interface.
- the SMO 180-a also may include a Non-RT RIC 175-a configured to support functionality of the SMO 180-a.
- the Non-RT RIC 175-a may be configured to include a logical function that enables non-real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources, Artificial Intelligence (AI) or Machine Learning (ML) workflows including model training and updates, or policy-based guidance of applications/features in the Near-RT RIC 175-b.
- the Non-RT RIC 175-a may be coupled to or communicate with (e.g., via an A1 interface) the Near-RT RIC 175-b.
- the Near-RT RIC 175-b may be configured to include a logical function that enables near-real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources via data collection and actions over an interface (e.g., via an E2 interface) connecting one or more CUs 160-a, one or more DUs 165-a, or both, as well as an O-eNB 210, with the Near-RT RIC 175-b.
- an interface e.g., via an E2 interface
- the Non-RT RIC 175-a may receive parameters or external enrichment information from external servers. Such information may be utilized by the Near-RT RIC 175-b and may be received at the SMO 180-a or the Non-RT RIC 175-a from non-network data sources or from network functions. In some examples, the Non-RT RIC 175-a or the Near-RT RIC 175-b may be configured to tune RAN behavior or performance.
- the Non-RT RIC 175-a may monitor long-term trends and patterns for performance and employ AI or ML models to perform corrective actions through the SMO 180-a (e.g., reconfiguration via O1) or via generation of RAN management policies (e.g., A1 policies) .
- AI or ML models to perform corrective actions through the SMO 180-a (e.g., reconfiguration via O1) or via generation of RAN management policies (e.g., A1 policies) .
- an RU 170-a may transmit, to a UE 115-a, a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value.
- the first burst may include a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- a same or different RU 170-a may transmit, to a UE 115-a, a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value.
- the second burst may include a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the UE 115-a may transmit, to the RU 170-a, DU 165-a, or CU 160-a, an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the RU 170-a, DU 165-a, or CU 160-a may utilize the indication of the frequency offset to update a precoder for transmitting one or more signals to the UE 115-a. Communication of bursts of reference signals or communication of a frequency offset may be performed as described with reference to FIG. 1 or any of FIGs. 3–19.
- FIG. 3 shows an example of a wireless communications system 300 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the wireless communications system 300 may implement aspects of or may be implemented by aspects of the wireless communications system 100 or the network architecture 200.
- the wireless communications system 300 includes a UE 115-b, which may be an example of a UE 115 described with respect to FIG. 1 or the UE 115-a described with respect to FIG. 2.
- the wireless communications system 300 also includes a network entity 105-a, which may be an example of a network entity 105 as described with respect to FIG. 1.
- the UE 115-b may communicate with the network entity 105-a using a communication link 125-b, which may be an example of a communication link 125 described with respect to FIG. 1 or an example of the communication link 125-a described with respect to FIG. 2.
- the communication link 125-b may include a bi-directional link that enables both uplink and downlink network communications.
- the UE 115-b may transmit one or more uplink transmissions 305, such as uplink control signals or uplink data signals, to the network entity 105-a using the communication link 125-b, and the network entity 105-a may transmit one or more downlink transmissions 310, such as downlink control signals or downlink data signals, to the UE 115-b using the communication link 125-b.
- one or more network entities 105-a may be utilized in accordance with some of the techniques described herein.
- one network entity 105-a may include multiple TRPs (e.g., a first TRP and a second TRP) .
- multiple network entities 105-a may be utilized, where each network entity 105-a includes one or more TRPs (e.g., a first network entity 105-a may include a first TRP and a second network entity 105-a may include a second TRP) .
- the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, a first burst 345 of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value.
- a burst of reference signals may be a set of reference signals.
- a burst of reference signals may include a series (e.g., two or more) reference signals over time.
- the reference signals may be CSI-RSs, TRSs, or another kind of reference signal.
- the first burst 345 may include a first reference signal 320 during a first occasion 350 and a second reference signal 325 during a second occasion 355 after a first interval from the first occasion 350.
- a QCL value may indicate a relationship between antenna ports.
- a first QCL value may indicate that an antenna port utilized to transmit a signal shares a delay spread, average delay, Doppler spread, or Doppler shift with another antenna port.
- a second QCL value may indicate that an antenna port utilized to transmit a signal shares a Doppler spread or Doppler shift with another antenna port.
- a third QCL value may indicate that an antenna port utilized to transmit a signal shares a Doppler shift or average delay with another antenna port.
- a fourth QCL value may indicate that an antenna port utilized to transmit a signal shares a spatial receive parameter with another antenna port.
- One or more other QCL values may be utilized in other examples.
- the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive a second burst 340 of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from (e.g., independent of, or other than) the first QCL value.
- the second burst 340 may include a third reference signal 330 during the first occasion 350 and a fourth reference signal 335 during the second occasion 355 after a second interval from the first occasion 350.
- reference signaling for a frequency offset measurement may include N > 1 reference signal bursts (e.g., the first burst 345 and the second burst 340) , where each reference signal (e.g., the first reference signal 320, the second reference signal 325, the third reference signal 330, or the fourth reference signal 335) is associated with a QCL value (e.g., each burst may correspond to each TRP, and thus N QCL values) .
- N 1 reference signal bursts
- each reference signal e.g., the first reference signal 320, the second reference signal 325, the third reference signal 330, or the fourth reference signal 335
- QCL value e.g., each burst may correspond to each TRP, and thus N QCL values
- a time interval may be greater than a threshold (e.g., greater than two slots, five slots, 10 slots, 12 slots, 13 slots, 15, slots, or 20 slots, among other examples) .
- a threshold e.g., greater than two slots, five slots, 10 slots, 12 slots, 13 slots, 15, slots, or 20 slots, among other examples.
- the time interval may be larger than a threshold (e.g., 10 or 20 slots, or larger than the 4 symbols in 2 slots of a TRS) .
- a time interval may be measured from the beginning of one reference signal (e.g., the first reference signal 320) to the beginning of another reference signal (e.g., the second reference signal 325) .
- a time interval may be expressed in slots, seconds, or another unit.
- the first interval may be equal to the second interval.
- the first interval may have a same duration as the second interval.
- the first interval and the second interval may partially or completely overlap in time.
- the first interval may be different from the second interval.
- the duration of the first interval may have a different length in time than the duration of the second interval.
- the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal 320 and the second reference signal 325.
- the second reference signal 325 may be output or received after the first interval from the first reference signal 320.
- the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal 330 and the fourth reference signal 335.
- the fourth reference signal 335 may be output or received after the second interval from the third reference signal 330.
- a first reference signaling arrangement for instance, N sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes L CSI-RSs with the same QCL value (e.g., each set corresponds to each burst and each TRP) .
- the first reference signaling arrangement may be according to a Type-II Doppler channel measurement resource extended for the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RSs within a set.
- An example of the first reference signaling arrangement is provided with reference to a first example 405-a in FIG. 4.
- the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, the first reference signal 320 and the third reference signal 330 during the first occasion 350 via a first set of CSI-RS resources.
- the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, the second reference signal 325 and the fourth reference signal 335 during the second occasion 355 via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- L sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes N single-port CSI-RSs with N QCL values (e.g., each set may correspond to all TRPs at an occasion group) .
- the second reference signaling arrangement may be according to a TDCP channel measurement resource extended for the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RS sets.
- An example of the second reference signaling arrangement is provided with reference to a second example 405-b in FIG. 4.
- each CSI-RS may correspond to each burst and each TRP, thus each having one QCL value
- each CSI-RS is parameterized with L offsets and occurs as L CSI-RS occasions.
- each CSI-RS may occur L times for aperiodic CSI-RS or may occur L times per period for periodic CSI-RS.
- An example of the third reference signaling arrangement is provided with reference to a third example 405-c in FIG. 4.
- the first occasion 350 may be within a first threshold duration or the second occasion 355 may be within a second threshold duration.
- different reference signal bursts within a same occasion group may satisfy a condition (e.g., threshold duration) for phase coherence or continuity between reference signals.
- a group of reference signals in an occasion e.g., in the first occasion 350 or the second occasion 355 may occur within a threshold duration (e.g., within a same slot or within two consecutive slots) .
- switching between downlink and uplink may not occur (e.g., may not be permitted or schedule) within the threshold duration.
- the network entity 105-a may frequency-division multiplex reference signals within an occasion.
- the first reference signal 320 and the third reference signal 330 in the first occasion 350 may be frequency-division multiplexed.
- a phase coherence or continuity condition may not be utilized between different occasion groups.
- ⁇ TRP#2to1 ⁇ TRP#2
- the network entity 105-a may employ one or more time interval patterns for L occasions within a burst.
- each pair may satisfy a time interval (e.g., may conform to the first interval or the second interval) .
- the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, additional reference signals of the first burst 345 during additional occasions (not shown in FIG. 3) that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval.
- at least one of the additional reference signals of the first burst 345 may be output or received between the first reference signal 320 and the second reference signal 325.
- the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, additional reference signals of the second burst 340 during additional occasions (not shown in FIG. 3) that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval.
- additional reference signals of the second burst 340 may be received between the third reference signal 330 and the fourth reference signal 335.
- An example of the first approach is given with reference to FIG. 5.
- each pair may satisfy a time interval (e.g., may conform to the first interval or the second interval) .
- the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, additional reference signals of the first burst 345 during additional occasions (not shown in FIG. 3) that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval.
- the additional reference signals of the first burst 345 may be output or received before the first reference signal 320 or after the second reference signal 325.
- the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, additional reference signals of the second burst 340 during additional occasions (not shown in FIG.
- the additional reference signals of the second burst 340 may be output or received before the third reference signal 330 or after the fourth reference signal 335.
- An example of the second approach is given with reference to FIG. 5.
- the first approach may utilize a relatively shorter time overall for measurement, but may utilize a larger buffer size at the UE 115-b than some other approaches (e.g., the second approach) .
- the second approach may have provide a relatively higher signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) due to L-1 time interval pairs, while the first approach has L/2.
- SNR signal-to-noise ratio
- the network entity 105-a may configure one of the reference signal occasions of a TRP to be the same as one of the CSI-RSs within a TRS set, for one or more TRPs.
- at least one of the N bursts e.g., N TRPs
- the TRS set may satisfy the time interval with respect to at least one of the L-1 CSI-RSs or occasions for the third reference signaling arrangement.
- Some of the approaches may extend a TDCP channel measurement resource (CMR) configuration.
- the first reference signal 320 may be associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling.
- a resource set for tracking reference signaling may be associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one TRS may be output or received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal 320 or the first occasion 350.
- Some examples of the techniques described herein may include periodic or aperiodic reference signaling (e.g., CSI-RSs) .
- aperiodic reference signaling e.g., aperiodic CSI-RS
- the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) a trigger for the UE 115-b to receive one or more bursts of reference signals.
- a difference in time e.g., a delta between the triggering offsets
- a difference in time e.g., a delta between the triggering offsets
- a difference in time e.g., offset between the triggering offsets
- a difference in time e.g., offset between the triggering offsets
- a difference in time e.g., offset between the triggering offsets
- a time interval e.g., the first interval or the second interval
- Aperiodic reference signaling may be utilized in accordance with the first reference signaling arrangement, the second reference signaling arrangement, or the third reference signaling arrangement (e.g., for the bursts or occasion groups of the first, second, or third reference signaling arrangements) .
- the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, based on an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal 320 and the second reference signal 325.
- the second reference signal 325 may be output or received after the first interval from the first reference signal 320.
- the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, based on the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal 330 and the fourth reference signal 335.
- the fourth reference signal 335 may be output or received after the second interval from the third reference signal 330.
- An example of aperiodic reference signaling is given with reference to FIG. 6.
- the network entity 105-a may configure the UE 115-b (e.g., may send a signal to configure the UE 115-b) to receive one or more bursts of reference signals periodically.
- periodic CSI-RS for instance, within a burst (e.g., a TRP) , a difference in time (e.g., a delta between the offsets within a periodicity) of at least two of the CSI-RS occasions (e.g., offset or delta of offsets) may be equal to a time interval (e.g., the first interval or the second interval) .
- Periodic reference signaling may be utilized in accordance with the first reference signaling arrangement, the second reference signaling arrangement, or the third reference signaling arrangement (e.g., for the bursts or occasion groups of the first, second, or third reference signaling arrangements) .
- the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, a signal indicating a period (e.g., periodicity) for outputting or receiving the first burst 345 and the second burst 340.
- a signal indicating a period (e.g., periodicity) for outputting or receiving the first burst 345 and the second burst 340.
- the signal may indicate a beginning (e.g., beginning slot) of a period, a length of the period, or a combination thereof.
- the first interval or the second interval may be based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
- An example of periodic reference signaling is given with reference to FIG. 6.
- the UE 115-b may utilize the reference signals (e.g., the first reference signal 320, the second reference signal 325, the third reference signal 330, or the fourth reference signal 335) to determine (e.g., calculate) a phase offset (e.g., an inter-TRP phase offset) or a frequency offset (e.g., an inter-TRP frequency offset) .
- the UE 115-b may transmit, or the network entity 105-a may receive, an indication 315 of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst 345 of reference signals and the second burst 340 of reference signals.
- the network entity 105-a may utilize the indication 315 of the frequency offset to update a precoder (e.g., to update a previously transmitted or obtained PMI) .
- the inter-TRP phase offset may be reported (e.g., sent to the network entity 105-a from the UE 115-b) for PDSCH precoding (relative to a previous PMI, for instance) .
- the UE 115-b may measure N CSI-RSs at time t0 (transmitted by N TRPs, for example) and may report the PMI for CJT. Based on the reported PMI, where the precoder may be denoted as the network entity 105-a may derive an inter-TRP phase offset (s) (by averaging across all ports of a pair of TRPs, for instance) .
- the CMR may be a multi-port CSI-RS.
- N multi-port CSI-RSs may be utilized (from N TRPs, respectively) .
- the UE 115-b may measure and report one or more inter-TRP phase offsets.
- ⁇ 1 (t 1 ) 0 may not be reported, resulting in N-1 inter-TRP phase (s) in total.
- N single-port CSI-RSs (from N TRPs respectively) may be utilized in some approaches.
- the network entity 105-a may apply a precoder for a CJT PDSCH at time t >t1 based on the phase offset (s) or the frequency offset (s) .
- the network entity 105-a may apply the precoder based on phase offset updates in accordance with:
- the channel for each TRP may be denoted as H TRP .
- the PMI may be updated less frequently than the phase report (e.g., PMI may be updated every 40 ms versus 5 or 10 ms for the phase offset) .
- the precoder may be assumed as constant until the next phase offset update (e.g., t1 to t2) or PMI update.
- one or more CJT PDSCH transmissions may occur between phase updates.
- the inter-TRP frequency offset may be reported (e.g., sent to the network entity 105-a from the UE 115-b) for PDSCH precoding (relative to a previous PMI or inter-TRP phase offset, for instance) .
- the UE 115-b may measure N CSI-RSs at time t0 (transmitted by N TRPs, for example) and may report the PMI for CJT as described herein.
- the precoder may be denoted as the network entity 105-amay derive an inter-TRP phase offset (s) (by averaging across all ports of a pair of TRPs, for instance) .
- a first TRP e.g., TRP#1
- the CMR may be a multi-port CSI-RS.
- N multi-port CSI-RSs may be utilized (from N TRPs, respectively) .
- N-1 inter-TRP phase offset (s) or frequency offset (s) in total may be reported.
- N single-port CSI-RSs (from N TRPs respectively) may be utilized in some approaches.
- the reference signaling may be different for phase measurement and frequency measurement.
- Phase measurement may utilize one-shot reference signaling in some examples.
- Frequency measurement may utilize a series of reference signal occasions over time (e.g., N TRSs from the N TRPs) .
- the network entity 105-a may apply a precoder for CJT PDSCH at time t >t1 in accordance with: based on a phase offset or frequency offset update.
- L time series of L reference signal occasions
- the network entity 105-a may utilize a precoder with a linear phase rotation over time until a phase offset update, a frequency offset update (e.g., t 1 to t 2 ) , or a PMI update.
- a phase offset update e.g., t 1 to t 2
- a PMI update e.g., a PMI update.
- one or more CJT PDSCH transmissions may occur between phase or frequency updates.
- the frequency offset may be greater than or equal to a minimum frequency offset value associated with antennas of the UE 115-b or may be less than or equal to a maximum frequency offset value associated with the antennas of the UE 115-b.
- the measured inter-TRP frequency offset may not be smaller than the minimum frequency offset measured by all antennas or receivers of the UE 115-b, and may not be larger than the maximum frequency offset measured by all antennas or receivers of the UE 115-b.
- the inter-TRP frequency offset may be an average frequency offset obtained by averaging across the multiple antennas or receivers.
- the UE 115-b may transmit, or the network entity 105-amay obtain, information indicating a capability of the UE 115-b related to reference signaling or frequency offset accuracy.
- the UE 115-b may transmit, or the network entity 105-a may obtain, information indicating a capability of the UE 115-b associated with a duration between the first occasion 350 and the second occasion 355.
- the UE 115-b may report a capability regarding a minimum length of a time interval (because the UE-measured inter-TRP frequency offset accuracy may be determined based on the length) .
- a relatively shorter time interval may demand a higher phase accuracy, and thus a higher demand on receiver sensitivity.
- the UE 115-b may transmit information indicating a maximum length (because the UE 115-b may buffer all received raw data over the time interval, for example) .
- the UE 115-b may transmit information indicating a capability of the UE 115-b associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
- the information may indicate an inter-TRP frequency offset accuracy.
- the inter-TRP frequency offset accuracy may be dependent on the length of time-interval.
- the information may indicate a capability related to an inter-TRP phase offset accuracy.
- Some examples of the techniques described herein may enable MIMO on UE-assisted CJT for multi-TRP (mTRP) scenarios.
- some of the reporting enhancements described may be utilized for CJT deployments.
- Some approaches may be performed with non-ideal synchronization or backhaul for frequency-division duplexing (FDD) or time-division duplexing (TDD) .
- Some aspects may be performed in one or more frequency ranges, such as frequency range 1 (FR1) .
- Some examples of the techniques may provide inter-TRP time misalignment and frequency or phase offset measurement and reporting with CSI-RS structures.
- Some approaches may be performed for periodic rea porting or stand-alone aperiodic reporting on PUSCH.
- FIG. 4 shows examples of timing diagrams 400 that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 4 illustrates a first example 405-a of reference signaling, a second example 405-b of reference signaling, and a third example 405-c of reference signaling.
- the first example 405-a is an example of a first reference signaling arrangement.
- a network entity e.g., network entity 105-a
- a UE e.g., UE 115-b
- the first burst 345-a may include a first reference signal 420-a during a first occasion 410-a and a second reference signal 425-a during a second occasion 415-a after a first interval 440-a from the first occasion 410-a.
- each burst may be communicated via a respective set of reference signal resources (e.g., CSI-RS resources) .
- the first reference signaling arrangement may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the first reference signal 420-a and the second reference signal 425-a may be communicated (e.g., outputted or received) , via a first set of CSI-RS resources.
- the second reference signal 425-a may be communicated after the first interval 440-a from the first reference signal 420-a.
- the third reference signal 430-aand the fourth reference signal 435-a may be communicated via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- the fourth reference signal 435-a may be communicated after the second interval 445-a from the third reference signal 430-a.
- the first interval 440-a may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots.
- the second interval 445-a may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots.
- the second example 405-b is an example of a second reference signaling arrangement.
- a network entity e.g., network entity 105-a
- a UE e.g., UE 115-b
- the first burst 345-b may include a first reference signal 420-b during a first occasion 410-b and a second reference signal 425-b during a second occasion 415-b after a first interval 440-b from the first occasion 410-b.
- the network entity may output, or the UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a second burst 340-b of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value.
- the second burst 340-b may include a third reference signal 430-b during the first occasion 410-b and a fourth reference signal 435-b during the second occasion 415-b after a second interval 445-b from the first occasion 410-b.
- each occasion may be communicated via a respective set of reference signal resources (e.g., CSI-RS resources) .
- the second reference signaling arrangement may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the first reference signal 420-b and the third reference signal 430-b may be communicated (e.g., outputted or received) , via a first set of CSI-RS resources.
- the second reference signal 425-b may be communicated after the first interval 440-b from the first reference signal 420-b.
- the second reference signal 425-b and the fourth reference signal 435-b may be communicated via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- the fourth reference signal 435-b may be communicated after the second interval 445-b from the third reference signal 430-b.
- the first interval 440-b may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots.
- the second interval 445-b may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots.
- the third example 405-c is an example of a third reference signaling arrangement.
- a network entity e.g., network entity 105-a
- a UE e.g., UE 115-b
- the first burst 345-c may include a first reference signal 420-c during a first occasion 410-c and a second reference signal 425-c during a second occasion 415-c after a first interval 440-c from the first occasion 410-c.
- the network entity may output, or the UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a second burst 340-c of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value.
- the second burst 340-c may include a third reference signal 430-c during the first occasion 410-c and a fourth reference signal 435-c during the second occasion 415-c after a second interval 445-c from the first occasion 410-c.
- one set of reference signal resources may be utilized.
- the third reference signaling arrangement may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- one set of single-port CSI-RS resources may be utilized, where each CSI-RS resource corresponds to each burst (e.g., the first burst 345-c and the second burst 340-c) and each TRP.
- Each CSI-RS resource may correspond to a QCL value.
- the first burst 345-c may be communicated via CSI-RS1 and the second burst 340-c may be communicated via CSI-RS2.
- the second reference signal 425-c may be communicated after the first interval 440-c from the first reference signal 420-c.
- the fourth reference signal 435-c may be communicated after the second interval 445-c from the third reference signal 430-c.
- the first interval 440-c may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots.
- the second interval 445-c may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots.
- FIG. 5 shows examples of timing diagrams 500 that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 5 illustrates a first example 505-a of reference signaling and a second example 505-b of reference signaling.
- the first approach may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- a network entity e.g., network entity 105-a
- a UE e.g., UE 115-b
- the first burst 345-d may include a first reference signal 520-a during a first occasion 510-a and a second reference signal 525-a during a second occasion 515-a after a first interval 540-a from the first occasion 510-a.
- the first burst 345-d may also include a first additional reference signal 580-aduring a third occasion 550-a and a second additional reference signal 590-a during a fourth occasion 555-a after a third interval 560-a from the third occasion 550-a.
- the network entity e.g., network entity 105-a
- may output, or the UE e.g., UE 115-b
- the second burst 340-d may include a third reference signal 530-a during the first occasion 510-a and a fourth reference signal 535-a during the second occasion 515-a after a second interval 545-afrom the first occasion 510-a.
- the second burst 340-d may also include a third additional reference signal 585-a during the third occasion 550-a and a fourth additional reference signal 595-a during the fourth occasion 555-a after a fourth interval 565-afrom the third occasion 550-a.
- the third interval 560-a (between the pair of the first additional reference signal 580-a and the second additional reference signal 590-a) is equal to the first interval 540-a (between the pair of the first reference signal 520-a and the second reference signal 525-a) .
- the fourth interval 565-a (between the pair of the third additional reference signal 585-a and the fourth additional reference signal 595-a) is equal to the second interval 545-a (between the pair of the first occasion 510-a and the second occasion 515-a) .
- the first interval 540-a, the second interval 545-a, the third interval 560-a, or the fourth interval 565-a may be 10 slots, 13 slots, 15 slots, 20 slots, or another quantity of slots or another amount of time.
- the first approach may utilize a relatively shorter time overall for measurement, but may utilize a larger buffer size at a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) than some other approaches.
- the second approach may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- a network entity e.g., network entity 105-a
- a UE e.g., UE 115-b
- the first burst 345-e may include a first reference signal 520-b during a first occasion 510-b and a second reference signal 525-b during a second occasion 515-b after a first interval 540-b from the first occasion 510-b.
- the first burst 345-e may also include a first additional reference signal 580-b during a third occasion 550-b after a first additional interval 570-b from the second occasion 515-b, and may include and a second additional reference signal 590-b during a fourth occasion 555-b after a third interval 560-b from the third occasion 550-b.
- the network entity e.g., network entity 105-a
- the second burst 340-e may include a third reference signal 530-b during the first occasion 510-b and a fourth reference signal 535-b during the second occasion 515-b after a second interval 545-b from the first occasion 510-b.
- the second burst 340-e may also include a third additional reference signal 585-b during the third occasion 550-b after a second additional interval 575-b and a fourth additional reference signal 595-b during the fourth occasion 555-b after a fourth interval 565-b from the third occasion 550-b.
- L 4 occasions.
- L-1 3 CSI-RS occasion pairs
- each pair satisfies a time interval.
- the first additional interval 570-b (between the pair of the second reference signal 525-b and the first additional reference signal 580-b) and the third interval 560-b are equal to the first interval 540-b (between the pair of the first reference signal 520-b and the second reference signal 525-b) .
- the second additional interval 575-b (between the pair of the fourth reference signal 535-b and the third additional reference signal 585-b) and the fourth interval 565-b (between the pair of the third additional reference signal 585-b and the fourth additional reference signal 595-b) are equal to the second interval 545-b (between the pair of the third reference signal 530-a and the fourth reference signal 535-a) .
- the first interval 540-b, the second interval 545-b, the third interval 560-b, or the fourth interval 565-b may be 10 slots, 13 slots, 15 slots, 20 slots, or another quantity of slots or another amount of time.
- the second approach may have provide a relatively higher SNR due to L-1 time interval pairs, while the first approach has L/2.
- FIG. 6 shows examples of timing diagrams 600 that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 6 illustrates a first example 505-a of reference signaling and a second example 505-b of reference signaling.
- the first example 605-a is an example of aperiodic reference signaling in accordance with some of the techniques described herein.
- Aperiodic reference signaling may be performed as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- a network entity e.g., network entity 105-a
- a UE e.g., UE 115-b
- a first occasion 610-a of reference signals may occur after a first trigger offset 625 (e.g., a first quantity of slots or amount of time) from the trigger 620, and a second occasion 615-a may occur after a second trigger offset 630 (e.g., a second quantity of slots or amount of time) from the trigger 620.
- a difference in time (e.g., a delta between the triggering offsets) of the first occasion 610-a and the second occasion 615-a (e.g., offset or delta of offsets) may be equal to a time interval 640.
- the second example 605-b is an example of periodic reference signaling in accordance with some of the techniques described herein.
- Periodic reference signaling may be performed as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- a network entity e.g., network entity 105-a
- a UE e.g., UE 115-b
- configuration signaling may indicate a first offset, a second offset, an interval, or a period (e.g., periodicity) .
- a first occasion 610-b of reference signals may occur after a first offset 645-a (e.g., a first quantity of slots or amount of time) from the beginning of a first period 655-a
- a second occasion 615-b may occur after a second offset 650-a (e.g., a second quantity of slots or amount of time) from the beginning of the first period 655-a.
- a difference in time e.g., a delta between the offsets
- the first occasion 610-b and the second occasion 615-b may be equal to a time interval 660-a.
- Periodic reference signaling may recur periodically. For instance, a second period 655-b may occur after the first period 655-a.
- a third occasion 618-b of reference signals may occur after a first offset 645-b (e.g., a first quantity of slots or amount of time) from the beginning of the second period 655-b
- a fourth occasion 622-b may occur after a second offset 650-b (e.g., a second quantity of slots or amount of time) from the beginning of the second period 655-b.
- a difference in time e.g., a delta between the offsets
- the third occasion 618-b and the fourth occasion 622-b (e.g., offset or delta of offsets) may be equal to a time interval 660-b.
- aperiodic reference signaling or periodic reference signaling may be utilized in accordance with the first reference signaling arrangement, the second reference signaling arrangement, or the third reference signaling arrangement as indicated in Table (1) :
- FIG. 7 shows an example of a process flow 700 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- a wireless communications system may include a UE 115-c and a network entity 105-b.
- the UE 115-c may be an example of the UEs 115, the UE 115-a, or the UE 115-b
- the network entity 105-b may be an example of the network entities 105 or the network entity 105-a, as described herein.
- the operations between the network entity 105-b and the UE 115-c may be transmitted in a different order than the example order shown, or the operations performed by the network entity 105-b and the UE 115-c may be performed in different orders or at different times. Some operations may be omitted from the process flow 700, and other operations may be added to the process flow 700. Further, although some operations or signaling may be shown to occur at different times for discussion purposes, these operations may actually occur at the same time or in overlapping time periods in some examples.
- the UE 115-c may transmit capability information to the network entity 105-b.
- the capability information may indicate a capability of the UE 115-c associated with (e.g., indicating) a duration between reference signaling occasions.
- the UE 115-c may transmit capability information as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the network entity 105-b may output a configuration message to the UE 115-c.
- the network entity 105-b may transmit a message indicating a configuration of the UE 115-c to calculate or provide an indication of an inter-TRP frequency offset.
- the configuration message may be output in response to the capability information.
- the configuration message may be communicated via an RRC message, a media access control (MAC) control element (CE) message, or another type of message.
- MAC media access control
- CE control element
- the network entity 105-b may output a first reference signal.
- the network entity 105-b may transmit a first CSI-RS via a CSI-RS resource as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the network entity 105-b may configure or schedule reference signal resources (e.g., CSI-RS resources) for bursts of reference signals corresponding to different TRPs. For example, the network entity 105-b may send one or more messages to configure or schedule one or more sets of reference signal resources for communicating (e.g., transmitting or receiving) multiple bursts of reference signals.
- a set of reference signal resources may be configured or scheduled corresponding to one burst and one TRP. For instance, a first set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled for a first burst (e.g., TRP) and a second set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled for a second burst (e.g., TRP) .
- a set of reference signal resources may be configured or scheduled corresponding to one occasion and multiple TRPs.
- a first set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled for a first occasion (e.g., with reference signaling corresponding to multiple bursts or TRPs) and a second set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled for a second occasion (e.g., with reference signaling corresponding to multiple bursts or TRPs) .
- a set of reference signal resources may be configured or scheduled, where each reference signal resource corresponding to one burst and one TRP.
- a set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled, where a first CSI-RS resource corresponds to a first occasion of a first burst (e.g., first TRP) , a second CSI-RS resource corresponds to a second occasion of a first burst (e.g., first TRP) , a third CSI-RS resource corresponds to a first occasion of a second burst (e.g., second TRP) , and a fourth CSI-RS resource corresponds to a second occasion of a second burst (e.g., second TRP) .
- the network entity 105-b may output a third reference signal.
- the network entity 105-b may transmit a third CSI-RS via a CSI-RS resource as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the network entity 105-b may output a second reference signal.
- the network entity 105-b may transmit a second CSI-RS via a CSI-RS resource as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal may be included in a first burst.
- the network entity 105-b may output a fourth reference signal.
- the network entity 105-b may transmit a fourth CSI-RS via a CSI-RS resource as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal may be included in a second burst.
- the UE 115-c may determine an inter-TRP frequency offset. For example, the UE 115-c may calculate an inter-TRP frequency offset as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the UE 115-c may transmit an indication of one or more frequency offsets.
- the UE 115-c may transmit an indication of the inter-TRP frequency offset (s) as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the inter-TRP frequency offset may differ from some channel feedback of other approaches. For example, some approaches may report phase or frequency information corresponding to a single TRP.
- the inter-TRP frequency offset may indicate an offset between multiple TRPs.
- the network entity 105-b may output a signal 730.
- the network entity 105-b may update a precoder based on the indication of the frequency offset, and may transmit a signal using the updated precoder.
- FIG. 8 shows a block diagram 800 of a device 805 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 805 may be an example of aspects of a UE 115 as described herein.
- the device 805 may include a receiver 810, a transmitter 815, and a communications manager 820.
- the device 805, or one or more components of the device 805 may include at least one processor, which may be coupled with at least one memory, to, individually or collectively, support or enable the described techniques. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the receiver 810 may provide a means for receiving information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 805.
- the receiver 810 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
- the transmitter 815 may provide a means for transmitting signals generated by other components of the device 805.
- the transmitter 815 may transmit information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) .
- the transmitter 815 may be co-located with a receiver 810 in a transceiver module.
- the transmitter 815 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
- the communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be examples of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein.
- the communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be capable of performing one or more of the functions described herein.
- the communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in hardware (e.g., in communications management circuitry) .
- the hardware may include at least one of a processor, a digital signal processor (DSP) , a central processing unit (CPU) , an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) , a field-programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, a microcontroller, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure.
- DSP digital signal processor
- CPU central processing unit
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
- FPGA field-programmable gate array
- microcontroller discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure.
- At least one processor and at least one memory coupled with the at least one processor may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein (e.g., by one or more processors, individually or collectively, executing instructions stored in the at least one memory) .
- the communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in code (e.g., as communications management software or firmware) executed by at least one processor (e.g., referred to as a processor-executable code) . If implemented in code executed by at least one processor, the functions of the communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be performed by a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA, a microcontroller, or any combination of these or other programmable logic devices (e.g., configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure) .
- the communications manager 820 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or both.
- the communications manager 820 may receive information from the receiver 810, send information to the transmitter 815, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
- the communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the device 805 e.g., at least one processor controlling or otherwise coupled with the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, the communications manager 820, or a combination thereof
- the device 805 may support techniques for reduced processing, reduced power consumption, or more efficient utilization of communication resources.
- FIG. 9 shows a block diagram 900 of a device 905 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 905 may be an example of aspects of a device 805 or a UE 115 as described herein.
- the device 905 may include a receiver 910, a transmitter 915, and a communications manager 920.
- the device 905, or one or more components of the device 905 may include at least one processor, which may be coupled with at least one memory, to support the described techniques. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the receiver 910 may provide a means for receiving information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 905.
- the receiver 910 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
- the transmitter 915 may provide a means for transmitting signals generated by other components of the device 905.
- the transmitter 915 may transmit information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) .
- the transmitter 915 may be co-located with a receiver 910 in a transceiver module.
- the transmitter 915 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
- the device 905, or various components thereof may be an example of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein.
- the communications manager 920 may include a reference signal component 925 a frequency offset component 930, or any combination thereof.
- the communications manager 920 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 820 as described herein.
- the communications manager 920, or various components thereof may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or both.
- the communications manager 920 may receive information from the receiver 910, send information to the transmitter 915, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
- the reference signal component 925 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the reference signal component 925 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the frequency offset component 930 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- FIG. 10 shows a block diagram 1000 of a communications manager 1020 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the communications manager 1020 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 820, a communications manager 920, or both, as described herein.
- the communications manager 1020, or various components thereof may be an example of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein.
- the communications manager 1020 may include a reference signal component 1025, a frequency offset component 1030, a capability component 1035, a period component 1040, or any combination thereof.
- Each of these components, or components or subcomponents thereof e.g., one or more processors, one or more memories
- the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the frequency offset component 1030 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal. In some examples, to support receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources. In some examples, to support receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, based on an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal. In some examples, to support receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, based on the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- the first interval is equal to the second interval.
- the first occasion is within a first threshold duration. In some examples, the second occasion is within a second threshold duration.
- the frequency offset is greater than or equal to a minimum frequency offset value associated with antennas of the UE and is less than or equal to a maximum frequency offset value associated with the antennas of the UE.
- the capability component 1035 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting information indicating a capability of the UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
- the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, where at least one of the additional reference signals of the first burst is received between the first reference signal and the second reference signal. In some examples, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, where at least one of the additional reference signals of the second burst is received between the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal.
- the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, where the additional reference signals of the first burst are received before the first reference signal or after the second reference signal. In some examples, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, where the additional reference signals of the second burst are received before the third reference signal or after the fourth reference signal.
- the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
- the period component 1040 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a signal indicating a period for receiving the first burst and the second burst, where the first interval or the second interval is based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
- FIG. 11 shows a diagram of a system 1100 including a device 1105 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 1105 may be an example of or include components of a device 805, a device 905, or a UE 115 as described herein.
- the device 1105 may communicate (e.g., wirelessly) with one or more other devices (e.g., network entities 105, UEs 115, or a combination thereof) .
- the device 1105 may include components for bi-directional voice and data communications including components for transmitting and receiving communications, such as a communications manager 1120, an input/output (I/O) controller, such as an I/O controller 1110, a transceiver 1115, one or more antennas 1125, at least one memory 1130, code 1135, and at least one processor 1140. These components may be in electronic communication or otherwise coupled (e.g., operatively, communicatively, functionally, electronically, electrically) via one or more buses (e.g., a bus 1145) .
- a bus 1145 e.g., a bus 1145
- the I/O controller 1110 may manage input and output signals for the device 1105.
- the I/O controller 1110 may also manage peripherals not integrated into the device 1105.
- the I/O controller 1110 may represent a physical connection or port to an external peripheral.
- the I/O controller 1110 may utilize an operating system such as or another known operating system.
- the I/O controller 1110 may represent or interact with a modem, a keyboard, a mouse, a touchscreen, or a similar device.
- the I/O controller 1110 may be implemented as part of one or more processors, such as the at least one processor 1140.
- a user may interact with the device 1105 via the I/O controller 1110 or via hardware components controlled by the I/O controller 1110.
- the device 1105 may include a single antenna. However, in some other cases, the device 1105 may have more than one antenna, which may be capable of concurrently transmitting or receiving multiple wireless transmissions.
- the transceiver 1115 may communicate bi-directionally via the one or more antennas 1125 using wired or wireless links as described herein.
- the transceiver 1115 may represent a wireless transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wireless transceiver.
- the transceiver 1115 may also include a modem to modulate the packets, to provide the modulated packets to one or more antennas 1125 for transmission, and to demodulate packets received from the one or more antennas 1125.
- the transceiver 1115 may be an example of a transmitter 815, a transmitter 915, a receiver 810, a receiver 910, or any combination thereof or component thereof, as described herein.
- the at least one memory 1130 may include random access memory (RAM) and read-only memory (ROM) .
- the at least one memory 1130 may store computer-readable, computer-executable, or processor-executable code, such as the code 1135.
- the code 1135 may include instructions that, when executed by the at least one processor 1140, cause the device 1105 to perform various functions described herein.
- the code 1135 may be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable medium such as system memory or another type of memory.
- the code 1135 may not be directly executable by the at least one processor 1140 but may cause a computer (e.g., when compiled and executed) to perform functions described herein.
- the at least one memory 1130 may include, among other things, a basic I/O system (BIOS) which may control basic hardware or software operation such as the interaction with peripheral components or devices.
- BIOS basic I/O system
- the at least one processor 1140 may include one or more intelligent hardware devices (e.g., one or more general-purpose processors, one or more DSPs, one or more central processing units (CPUs) , one or more graphics processing units (GPUs) , one or more neural processing units (NPUs) (also referred to as neural network processors or deep learning processors (DLPs) ) , one or more microcontrollers, one or more ASICs, one or more FPGAs, one or more programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, one or more discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof) .
- the at least one processor 1140 may be configured to operate a memory array using a memory controller.
- a memory controller may be integrated into the at least one processor 1140.
- the at least one processor 1140 may be configured to execute computer-readable instructions stored in a memory (e.g., the at least one memory 1130) to cause the device 1105 to perform various functions (e.g., functions or tasks supporting reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) .
- the device 1105 or a component of the device 1105 may include at least one processor 1140 and at least one memory 1130 coupled with or to the at least one processor 1140, the at least one processor 1140 and the at least one memory 1130 configured to perform various functions described herein.
- the at least one processor 1140 may include multiple processors and the at least one memory 1130 may include multiple memories.
- the at least one processor 1140 may be a component of a processing system, which may refer to a system (such as a series) of machines, circuitry (including, for example, one or both of processor circuitry (which may include the at least one processor 1140) and memory circuitry (which may include the at least one memory 1130) ) , or components, that receives or obtains inputs and processes the inputs to produce, generate, or obtain a set of outputs.
- the processing system may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein.
- the at least one processor 1140 or a processing system including the at least one processor 1140 may be configured to, configurable to, or operable to cause the device 1105 to perform one or more of the functions described herein.
- being “configured to, ” being “configurable to, ” and being “operable to” may be used interchangeably and may be associated with a capability, when executing code 1135 (e.g., processor-executable code) stored in the at least one memory 1130 or otherwise, to perform one or more of the functions described herein.
- code 1135 e.g., processor-executable code
- the communications manager 1120 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the communications manager 1120 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the communications manager 1120 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the device 1105 may support techniques for improved communication reliability, reduced latency, reduced power consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources, improved coordination between devices, longer battery life, or improved utilization of processing capability.
- the communications manager 1120 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, monitoring, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the transceiver 1115, the one or more antennas 1125, or any combination thereof.
- the communications manager 1120 is illustrated as a separate component, in some examples, one or more functions described with reference to the communications manager 1120 may be supported by or performed by the at least one processor 1140, the at least one memory 1130, the code 1135, or any combination thereof.
- the code 1135 may include instructions executable by the at least one processor 1140 to cause the device 1105 to perform various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein, or the at least one processor 1140 and the at least one memory 1130 may be otherwise configured to, individually or collectively, perform or support such operations.
- FIG. 12 shows a block diagram 1200 of a device 1205 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 1205 may be an example of aspects of a network entity 105 as described herein.
- the device 1205 may include a receiver 1210, a transmitter 1215, and a communications manager 1220.
- the device 1205, or one or more components of the device 1205 may include at least one processor, which may be coupled with at least one memory, to, individually or collectively, support or enable the described techniques. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the receiver 1210 may provide a means for obtaining (e.g., receiving, determining, identifying) information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) .
- Information may be passed on to other components of the device 1205.
- the receiver 1210 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the receiver 1210 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the transmitter 1215 may provide a means for outputting (e.g., transmitting, providing, conveying, sending) information generated by other components of the device 1205.
- the transmitter 1215 may output information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) .
- the transmitter 1215 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the transmitter 1215 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the transmitter 1215 and the receiver 1210 may be co-located in a transceiver, which may include or be coupled with a modem.
- the communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be examples of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein.
- the communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be capable of performing one or more of the functions described herein.
- the communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in hardware (e.g., in communications management circuitry) .
- the hardware may include at least one of a processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA or other programmable logic device, a microcontroller, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure.
- at least one processor and at least one memory coupled with the at least one processor may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein (e.g., by one or more processors, individually or collectively, executing instructions stored in the at least one memory) .
- the communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in code (e.g., as communications management software or firmware) executed by at least one processor (e.g., referred to as a processor-executable code) . If implemented in code executed by at least one processor, the functions of the communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be performed by a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA, a microcontroller, or any combination of these or other programmable logic devices (e.g., configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure) .
- a general-purpose processor e.g., a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA, a microcontroller, or any combination of these or other programmable logic devices (e.g., configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions
- the communications manager 1220 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or both.
- the communications manager 1220 may receive information from the receiver 1210, send information to the transmitter 1215, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
- the communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the device 1205 e.g., at least one processor controlling or otherwise coupled with the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, the communications manager 1220, or a combination thereof
- the device 1205 may support techniques for reduced processing, reduced power consumption, or more efficient utilization of communication resources.
- FIG. 13 shows a block diagram 1300 of a device 1305 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 1305 may be an example of aspects of a device 1205 or a network entity 105 as described herein.
- the device 1305 may include a receiver 1310, a transmitter 1315, and a communications manager 1320.
- the device 1305, or one or more components of the device 1305 may include at least one processor, which may be coupled with at least one memory, to support the described techniques. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the receiver 1310 may provide a means for obtaining (e.g., receiving, determining, identifying) information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) .
- Information may be passed on to other components of the device 1305.
- the receiver 1310 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the receiver 1310 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the transmitter 1315 may provide a means for outputting (e.g., transmitting, providing, conveying, sending) information generated by other components of the device 1305.
- the transmitter 1315 may output information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) .
- the transmitter 1315 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the transmitter 1315 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the transmitter 1315 and the receiver 1310 may be co-located in a transceiver, which may include or be coupled with a modem.
- the device 1305, or various components thereof may be an example of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein.
- the communications manager 1320 may include a reference signal manager 1325 a frequency offset manager 1330, or any combination thereof.
- the communications manager 1320 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 1220 as described herein.
- the communications manager 1320, or various components thereof may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 1310, the transmitter 1315, or both.
- the communications manager 1320 may receive information from the receiver 1310, send information to the transmitter 1315, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 1310, the transmitter 1315, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
- the reference signal manager 1325 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the reference signal manager 1325 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the frequency offset manager 1330 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- FIG. 14 shows a block diagram 1400 of a communications manager 1420 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the communications manager 1420 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 1220, a communications manager 1320, or both, as described herein.
- the communications manager 1420, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein.
- the communications manager 1420 may include a reference signal manager 1425, a frequency offset manager 1430, a capability manager 1435, a period manager 1440, or any combination thereof.
- Each of these components, or components or subcomponents thereof may communicate, directly or indirectly, with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the communications may include communications within a protocol layer of a protocol stack, communications associated with a logical channel of a protocol stack (e.g., between protocol layers of a protocol stack, within a device, component, or virtualized component associated with a network entity 105, between devices, components, or virtualized components associated with a network entity 105) , or any combination thereof.
- the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the frequency offset manager 1430 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal. In some examples, to support outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources. In some examples, to support outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal and during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting, in association with an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal. In some examples, to support outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting, in association with the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- the capability manager 1435 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for obtaining information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
- the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
- the period manager 1440 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a signal indicating a period for outputting the first burst and the second burst, where the first interval or the second interval is based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
- FIG. 15 shows a diagram of a system 1500 including a device 1505 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 1505 may be an example of or include components of a device 1205, a device 1305, or a network entity 105 as described herein.
- the device 1505 may communicate with other network devices or network equipment such as one or more of the network entities 105, UEs 115, or any combination thereof.
- the communications may include communications over one or more wired interfaces, over one or more wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the device 1505 may include components that support outputting and obtaining communications, such as a communications manager 1520, a transceiver 1510, one or more antennas 1515, at least one memory 1525, code 1530, and at least one processor 1535. These components may be in electronic communication or otherwise coupled (e.g., operatively, communicatively, functionally, electronically, electrically) via one or more buses (e.g., a bus 1540) .
- a communications manager 1520 e.g., operatively, communicatively, functionally, electronically, electrically
- buses e.g., a bus 1540
- the transceiver 1510 may support bi-directional communications via wired links, wireless links, or both as described herein.
- the transceiver 1510 may include a wired transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wired transceiver. Additionally, or alternatively, in some examples, the transceiver 1510 may include a wireless transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wireless transceiver.
- the device 1505 may include one or more antennas 1515, which may be capable of transmitting or receiving wireless transmissions (e.g., concurrently) .
- the transceiver 1510 may also include a modem to modulate signals, to provide the modulated signals for transmission (e.g., by one or more antennas 1515, by a wired transmitter) , to receive modulated signals (e.g., from one or more antennas 1515, from a wired receiver) , and to demodulate signals.
- the transceiver 1510 may include one or more interfaces, such as one or more interfaces coupled with the one or more antennas 1515 that are configured to support various receiving or obtaining operations, or one or more interfaces coupled with the one or more antennas 1515 that are configured to support various transmitting or outputting operations, or a combination thereof.
- the transceiver 1510 may include or be configured for coupling with one or more processors or one or more memory components that are operable to perform or support operations based on received or obtained information or signals, or to generate information or other signals for transmission or other outputting, or any combination thereof.
- the transceiver 1510, or the transceiver 1510 and the one or more antennas 1515, or the transceiver 1510 and the one or more antennas 1515 and one or more processors or one or more memory components may be included in a chip or chip assembly that is installed in the device 1505.
- the transceiver 1510 may be operable to support communications via one or more communications links (e.g., communication link (s) 125, backhaul communication link (s) 120, a midhaul communication link 162, a fronthaul communication link 168) .
- communications links e.g., communication link (s) 125, backhaul communication link (s) 120, a midhaul communication link 162, a fronthaul communication link 168) .
- the at least one memory 1525 may include RAM, ROM, or any combination thereof.
- the at least one memory 1525 may store computer-readable, computer- executable, or processor-executable code, such as the code 1530.
- the code 1530 may include instructions that, when executed by one or more of the at least one processor 1535, cause the device 1505 to perform various functions described herein.
- the code 1530 may be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable medium such as system memory or another type of memory. In some cases, the code 1530 may not be directly executable by a processor of the at least one processor 1535 but may cause a computer (e.g., when compiled and executed) to perform functions described herein.
- the at least one memory 1525 may include, among other things, a BIOS which may control basic hardware or software operation such as the interaction with peripheral components or devices.
- the at least one processor 1535 may include multiple processors and the at least one memory 1525 may include multiple memories.
- One or more of the multiple processors may be coupled with one or more of the multiple memories which may, individually or collectively, be configured to perform various functions herein (for example, as part of a processing system) .
- the at least one processor 1535 may include one or more intelligent hardware devices (e.g., one or more general-purpose processors, one or more DSPs, one or more central processing units (CPUs) , one or more graphics processing units (GPUs) , one or more neural processing units (NPUs) (also referred to as neural network processors or deep learning processors (DLPs) ) , one or more microcontrollers, one or more ASICs, one or more FPGAs, one or more programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, one or more discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof) .
- the at least one processor 1535 may be configured to operate a memory array using a memory controller.
- a memory controller may be integrated into one or more of the at least one processor 1535.
- the at least one processor 1535 may be configured to execute computer-readable instructions stored in a memory (e.g., one or more of the at least one memory 1525) to cause the device 1505 to perform various functions (e.g., functions or tasks supporting reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) .
- the device 1505 or a component of the device 1505 may include at least one processor 1535 and at least one memory 1525 coupled with one or more of the at least one processor 1535, the at least one processor 1535 and the at least one memory 1525 configured to perform various functions described herein.
- the at least one processor 1535 may be an example of a cloud- computing platform (e.g., one or more physical nodes and supporting software such as operating systems, virtual machines, or container instances) that may host the functions (e.g., by executing code 1530) to perform the functions of the device 1505.
- the at least one processor 1535 may be any one or more suitable processors capable of executing scripts or instructions of one or more software programs stored in the device 1505 (such as within one or more of the at least one memory 1525) .
- the at least one processor 1535 may include multiple processors and the at least one memory 1525 may include multiple memories. One or more of the multiple processors may be coupled with one or more of the multiple memories, which may, individually or collectively, be configured to perform various functions herein.
- the at least one processor 1535 may be a component of a processing system, which may refer to a system (such as a series) of machines, circuitry (including, for example, one or both of processor circuitry (which may include the at least one processor 1535) and memory circuitry (which may include the at least one memory 1525) ) , or components, that receives or obtains inputs and processes the inputs to produce, generate, or obtain a set of outputs.
- the processing system may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein.
- the at least one processor 1535 or a processing system including the at least one processor 1535 may be configured to, configurable to, or operable to cause the device 1505 to perform one or more of the functions described herein.
- being “configured to, ” being “configurable to, ” and being “operable to” may be used interchangeably and may be associated with a capability, when executing code stored in the at least one memory 1525 or otherwise, to perform one or more of the functions described herein.
- a bus 1540 may support communications of (e.g., within) a protocol layer of a protocol stack. In some examples, a bus 1540 may support communications associated with a logical channel of a protocol stack (e.g., between protocol layers of a protocol stack) , which may include communications performed within a component of the device 1505, or between different components of the device 1505 that may be co-located or located in different locations (e.g., where the device 1505 may refer to a system in which one or more of the communications manager 1520, the transceiver 1510, the at least one memory 1525, the code 1530, and the at least one processor 1535 may be located in one of the different components or divided between different components) .
- a logical channel of a protocol stack e.g., between protocol layers of a protocol stack
- the device 1505 may refer to a system in which one or more of the communications manager 1520, the transceiver 1510, the at least one memory 1525, the code 1530, and the at least one
- the communications manager 1520 may manage aspects of communications with a core network 130 (e.g., via one or more wired or wireless backhaul links) .
- the communications manager 1520 may manage the transfer of data communications for client devices, such as one or more UEs 115.
- the communications manager 1520 may manage communications with one or more other network entities 105, and may include a controller or scheduler for controlling communications with UEs 115 (e.g., in cooperation with the one or more other network devices) .
- the communications manager 1520 may support an X2 interface within an LTE/LTE-A wireless communications network technology to provide communication between network entities 105.
- the communications manager 1520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the communications manager 1520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the communications manager 1520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the device 1505 may support techniques for improved communication reliability, reduced latency, reduced power consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources, improved coordination between devices, longer battery life, or improved utilization of processing capability.
- the communications manager 1520 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the transceiver 1510, the one or more antennas 1515 (e.g., where applicable) , or any combination thereof.
- the communications manager 1520 is illustrated as a separate component, in some examples, one or more functions described with reference to the communications manager 1520 may be supported by or performed by the transceiver 1510, one or more of the at least one processor 1535, one or more of the at least one memory 1525, the code 1530, or any combination thereof (for example, by a processing system including at least a portion of the at least one processor 1535, the at least one memory 1525, the code 1530, or any combination thereof) .
- the code 1530 may include instructions executable by one or more of the at least one processor 1535 to cause the device 1505 to perform various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein, or the at least one processor 1535 and the at least one memory 1525 may be otherwise configured to, individually or collectively, perform or support such operations.
- FIG. 16 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1600 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the operations of the method 1600 may be implemented by a UE or its components as described herein.
- the operations of the method 1600 may be performed by a UE 115 as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 11.
- a UE may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the UE to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the UE may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
- the method may include receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the operations of 1605 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1605 may be performed by a reference signal component 1025 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
- the method may include receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the operations of 1610 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1610 may be performed by a reference signal component 1025 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
- the method may include transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the operations of 1615 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1615 may be performed by a frequency offset component 1030 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
- FIG. 17 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1700 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the operations of the method 1700 may be implemented by a UE or its components as described herein.
- the operations of the method 1700 may be performed by a UE 115 as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 11.
- a UE may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the UE to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the UE may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
- the method may include transmitting information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between a first occasion and a second occasion or associated with an accuracy of a frequency offset.
- the operations of 1705 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1705 may be performed by a capability component 1035 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
- the method may include receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during the first occasion and the second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the operations of 1710 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1710 may be performed by a reference signal component 1025 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
- the method may include receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the operations of 1715 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1715 may be performed by a reference signal component 1025 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
- the method may include transmitting an indication of the frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the operations of 1720 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1720 may be performed by a frequency offset component 1030 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
- FIG. 18 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1800 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the operations of the method 1800 may be implemented by a network entity or its components as described herein.
- the operations of the method 1800 may be performed by a network entity as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 7 and 12 through 15.
- a network entity may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the network entity to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the network entity may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
- the method may include outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the operations of 1805 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1805 may be performed by a reference signal manager 1425 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
- the method may include outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the operations of 1810 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1810 may be performed by a reference signal manager 1425 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
- the method may include receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the operations of 1815 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1815 may be performed by a frequency offset manager 1430 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
- FIG. 19 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1900 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the operations of the method 1900 may be implemented by a network entity or its components as described herein.
- the operations of the method 1900 may be performed by a network entity as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 7 and 12 through 15.
- a network entity may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the network entity to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the network entity may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
- the method may include obtaining information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between a first occasion and a second occasion or associated with an accuracy of a frequency offset.
- the operations of 1905 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1905 may be performed by a capability manager 1435 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
- the method may include outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during the first occasion and a second reference signal during the second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion.
- the operations of 1910 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1910 may be performed by a reference signal manager 1425 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
- the method may include outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion.
- the operations of 1915 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1915 may be performed by a reference signal manager 1425 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
- the method may include receiving an indication of the frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- the operations of 1920 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1920 may be performed by a frequency offset manager 1430 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
- a method for wireless communications at a UE comprising: receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst comprising a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion; receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst comprising a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion; and transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based at least in part on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- Aspect 2 The method of aspect 1, wherein receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: receiving, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal; and receiving, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- Aspect 3 The method of aspect 1, wherein receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: receiving the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources; and receiving the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- Aspect 4 The method of any of aspects 1 through 3, wherein receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: receiving, based at least in part on an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal; and receiving, based at least in part on the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- Aspect 5 The method of any of aspects 1 through 4, wherein the first interval is equal to the second interval.
- Aspect 6 The method of any of aspects 1 through 5, wherein the first occasion is within a first threshold duration, and the second occasion is within a second threshold duration.
- Aspect 7 The method of any of aspects 1 through 6, wherein the frequency offset is greater than or equal to a minimum frequency offset value associated with antennas of the UE and is less than or equal to a maximum frequency offset value associated with the antennas of the UE.
- Aspect 8 The method of any of aspects 1 through 7, further comprising: transmitting information indicating a capability of the UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
- Aspect 9 The method of any of aspects 1 through 8, further comprising: receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, wherein at least one of the additional reference signals of the first burst is received between the first reference signal and the second reference signal; and receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, wherein at least one of the additional reference signals of the second burst is received between the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal.
- Aspect 10 The method of any of aspects 1 through 9, further comprising: receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, wherein the additional reference signals of the first burst are received before the first reference signal or after the second reference signal; and receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, wherein the additional reference signals of the second burst are received before the third reference signal or after the fourth reference signal.
- Aspect 11 The method of any of aspects 1 through 10, wherein the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
- Aspect 12 The method of any of aspects 1 through 3 and 5 through 11, further comprising: receiving a signal indicating a period for receiving the first burst and the second burst, wherein the first interval or the second interval is based at least in part on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
- a method for wireless communications at a network entity comprising: outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst comprising a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion; outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst comprising a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion; and receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based at least in part on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- Aspect 14 The method of aspect 13, wherein outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: outputting, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal; and outputting, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- Aspect 15 The method of aspect 13, wherein outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: outputting the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources; and outputting the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal and during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- Aspect 16 The method of any of aspects 13 through 15, wherein outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: outputting, in association with an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal; and outputting, in association with the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- Aspect 17 The method of any of aspects 13 through 16, further comprising: obtaining information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
- Aspect 18 The method of any of aspects 13 through 17, wherein the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
- Aspect 19 The method of any of aspects 13 through 15, 17, and 18, further comprising: outputting a signal indicating a period for outputting the first burst and the second burst, wherein the first interval or the second interval is based at least in part on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
- a UE comprising one or more memories storing processor-executable code, and one or more processors coupled with the one or more memories and individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the UE to perform a method of any of aspects 1 through 12.
- a UE comprising at least one means for performing a method of any of aspects 1 through 12.
- Aspect 22 A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code the code comprising instructions executable by one or more processors to perform a method of any of aspects 1 through 12.
- a network entity comprising one or more memories storing processor-executable code, and one or more processors coupled with the one or more memories and individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to perform a method of any of aspects 13 through 19.
- a network entity comprising at least one means for performing a method of any of aspects 13 through 19.
- Aspect 25 A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code the code comprising instructions executable by one or more processors to perform a method of any of aspects 13 through 19.
- LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR may be described for purposes of example, and LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR terminology may be used in much of the description, the techniques described herein are applicable beyond LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR networks.
- the described techniques may be applicable to various other wireless communications systems such as Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB) , Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 (Wi-Fi) , IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX) , IEEE 802.20, Flash-OFDM, as well as other systems and radio technologies not explicitly mentioned herein.
- UMB Ultra Mobile Broadband
- IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
- Wi-Fi Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
- WiMAX IEEE 802.16
- IEEE 802.20 Flash-OFDM
- Information and signals described herein may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies and techniques.
- data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips that may be referenced throughout the description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, optical fields or particles, or any combination thereof.
- a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor but, in the alternative, the processor may be any processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
- a processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices (e.g., a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration) . Any functions or operations described herein as being capable of being performed by a processor may be performed by multiple processors that, individually or collectively, are capable of performing the described functions or operations.
- the functions described herein may be implemented using hardware, software executed by a processor, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented using software executed by a processor, the functions may be stored as or transmitted using one or more instructions or code of a computer-readable medium. Other examples and implementations are within the scope of the disclosure and appended claims. For example, due to the nature of software, functions described herein may be implemented using software executed by a processor, hardware, firmware, hardwiring, or combinations of any of these. Features implementing functions may also be physically located at various positions, including being distributed such that portions of functions are implemented at different physical locations.
- Computer-readable media includes both non-transitory computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one location to another.
- a non-transitory storage medium may be any available medium that may be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer.
- non-transitory computer-readable media may include RAM, ROM, electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM) , flash memory, compact disk (CD) ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other non-transitory medium that may be used to carry or store desired program code means in the form of instructions or data structures and that may be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer or a general-purpose or special-purpose processor.
- any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
- the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL) , or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave
- the coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of computer-readable medium.
- Disk and disc include CD, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD) , floppy disk, and Blu-ray disc. Disks may reproduce data magnetically, and discs may reproduce data optically using lasers. Combinations of the above are also included within the scope of computer-readable media. Any functions or operations described herein as being capable of being performed by a memory may be performed by multiple memories that, individually or collectively, are capable of performing the described functions or operations.
- the article “a” before a noun is open-ended and understood to refer to “at least one” of those nouns or “one or more” of those nouns.
- the terms “a, ” “at least one, ” “one or more, ” and “at least one of one or more” may be interchangeable.
- a claim recites “a component” that performs one or more functions, each of the individual functions may be performed by a single component or by any combination of multiple components.
- the term “acomponent” having characteristics or performing functions may refer to “at least one of one or more components” having a particular characteristic or performing a particular function.
- a component introduced with the article “a” using the terms “the” or “said” may refer to any or all of the one or more components.
- a component introduced with the article “a” may be understood to mean “one or more components, ” and referring to “the component” subsequently in the claims may be understood to be equivalent to referring to “at least one of the one or more components.
- subsequent reference to a component introduced as “one or more components” using the terms “the” or “said” may refer to any or all of the one or more components.
- referring to “the one or more components” subsequently in the claims may be understood to be equivalent to referring to “at least one of the one or more components. ”
- determining encompasses a variety of actions and, therefore, “determining” can include calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up (such as via looking up in a table, a database, or another data structure) , ascertaining, and the like. Also, “determining” can include receiving (e.g., receiving information) , accessing (e.g., accessing data stored in memory) , and the like. Also, “determining” can include resolving, obtaining, selecting, choosing, establishing, and other such similar actions.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Some examples of the techniques described herein provide reference signaling for estimating frequency offsets between TRPs. Some approaches to enhance the phase offset accuracy may include increasing the time interval of the measurement resources. Because an inter-TRP frequency offset may be smaller than a TRP-UE frequency difference, increasing the time interval of the measurement resources may improve measurement accuracy. In some examples, reference signaling for frequency offset measurement may include N > 1 reference signal bursts, where each reference signal is associated with a quasi co-location (QCL) value (e.g., each burst may correspond to each TRP, and thus N QCL values). Within each burst, a time interval between at least two of L CSI-RS occasions (e.g., L = 2 or 4) may be utilized for inter-burst (e.g., inter-TRP) frequency offset measurement. The time interval may be larger than a threshold.
Description
FIELD OF TECHNOLOGY
The following relates to wireless communications, including reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception points.
Wireless communications systems are widely deployed to provide various types of communication content such as voice, video, packet data, messaging, broadcast, and so on. These systems may be capable of supporting communication with multiple users by sharing the available system resources (e.g., time, frequency, and power) . Examples of such multiple-access systems include fourth generation (4G) systems such as Long Term Evolution (LTE) systems, LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) systems, or LTE-A Pro systems, and fifth generation (5G) systems which may be referred to as New Radio (NR) systems. These systems may employ technologies such as code division multiple access (CDMA) , time division multiple access (TDMA) , frequency division multiple access (FDMA) , orthogonal FDMA (OFDMA) , or discrete Fourier transform spread orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (DFT-S-OFDM) . A wireless multiple-access communications system may include one or more base stations, each supporting wireless communication for communication devices, which may be known as user equipment (UE) .
Some examples of the techniques described herein provide reference signaling for estimating frequency offsets between transmission-reception points (TRPs) . Some approaches to enhance the phase offset accuracy may include increasing the time interval of the measurement resources. In a first reference signaling arrangement, N sets of single-port channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) may be utilized, where each set includes L CSI-RSs with the same quasi co-location (QCL) value (e.g., each set corresponds to each burst and each TRP) . In a second reference signaling arrangement, L sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes N single-port CSI-RSs with N QCL values (e.g., each set may
correspond to all TRPs at an occasion group) . In a third reference signaling arrangement, one set of N single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized (e.g., each CSI-RS may correspond to each burst and each TRP, thus each having one QCL value) , where each CSI-RS is parameterized with L offsets and occurs as L CSI-RS occasions. For instance, each CSI-RS may occur L times for aperiodic CSI-RS or may occur L times per period for periodic CSI-RS.
A method by a UE is described. The method may include receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
A UE is described. The UE may include one or more memories storing processor executable code, and one or more processors coupled with the one or more memories. The one or more processors may individually or collectively be operable to execute the code to cause the UE to receive a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, receive a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and transmit an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
Another UE is described. The UE may include means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference
signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code is described. The code may include instructions executable by one or more processors to receive a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, receive a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and transmit an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
In some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal may be received after the first interval from the first reference signal and receiving, via a second set of channel state information CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal may be received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
In some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources and receiving the second reference signal
and the fourth reference signal during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
In some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving, based on an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal may be received after the first interval from the first reference signal and receiving, based on the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal may be received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
In some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first interval may be equal to the second interval.
In some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first occasion may be within a first threshold duration and the second occasion may be within a second threshold duration.
In some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the frequency offset may be greater than or equal to a minimum frequency offset value associated with antennas of the UE and may be less than or equal to a maximum frequency offset value associated with the antennas of the UE.
Some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting information indicating a capability of the UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
Some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that may be separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration may be equal to the first interval, where at least one of the additional reference
signals of the first burst may be received between the first reference signal and the second reference signal and receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that may be separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration may be equal to the second interval, where at least one of the additional reference signals of the second burst may be received between the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal.
Some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that may be separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration may be equal to the first interval, where the additional reference signals of the first burst may be received before the first reference signal or after the second reference signal and receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that may be separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration may be equal to the second interval, where the additional reference signals of the second burst may be received before the third reference signal or after the fourth reference signal.
In some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first reference signal may be associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling may be associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal may be received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
Some examples of the method, UEs, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving a signal indicating a period for receiving the first burst and the second burst, where the first interval or the second interval may be based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
A method by a network entity is described. The method may include outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a
second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
A network entity is described. The network entity may include one or more memories storing processor executable code, and one or more processors coupled with the one or more memories. The one or more processors may individually or collectively be operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to output a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, output a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and receive an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
Another network entity is described. The network entity may include means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code is described. The code may include instructions executable by one or more processors to output a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion, output a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion, and receive an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
In some examples of the method, network entities, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for outputting, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal may be output after the first interval from the first reference signal and outputting, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal may be output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
In some examples of the method, network entities, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for outputting the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources and outputting the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal and during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
In some examples of the method, network entities, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals may include operations, features, means, or instructions for outputting, in association with an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal may
be output after the first interval from the first reference signal and outputting, in association with the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal may be output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
Some examples of the method, network entities, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for obtaining information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
In some examples of the method, network entities, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first reference signal may be associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling may be associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal may be received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
Some examples of the method, network entities, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for outputting a signal indicating a period for outputting the first burst and the second burst, where the first interval or the second interval may be based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
FIG. 1 shows an example of a wireless communications system that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception points (TRPs) in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 2 shows an example of a network architecture that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 3 shows an example of a wireless communications system that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 4 shows examples of timing diagrams that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 5 shows examples of timing diagrams that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 6 shows examples of timing diagrams that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 7 shows an example of a process flow that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIGs. 8 and 9 show block diagrams of devices that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 10 shows a block diagram of a communications manager that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 11 shows a diagram of a system including a device that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIGs. 12 and 13 show block diagrams of devices that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 14 shows a block diagram of a communications manager that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 15 shows a diagram of a system including a device that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIGs. 16 through 19 show flowcharts illustrating methods that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
Some wireless communications systems perform multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) communications. To enhance MIMO communications, precoding may be performed to communicate data streams via multiple layers or to control beamforming. In some approaches, a network entity may transmit reference signals (e.g., channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) ) to a UE. The UE may utilize the reference signals to determine a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) , which may be transmitted to the network entity for use in precoding. Transmitting a full PMI may consume a relatively large amount of resources for communication. To reduce resource consumption, phase offsets or frequency offsets may be determined by the UE and transmitted to the network entity instead of a full PMI. The network entity may utilize the phase offsets or frequency offsets to adjust precoding.
In some approaches, the UE may measure N CSI-RSs at time t0 (transmitted by N transmission-reception points (TRPs) , for example) and may report the PMI for coherent joint transmission (CJT) . Based on the reported PMI, the network entity may derive an inter-TRP phase offset (s) (by averaging across all ports of a pair of TRPs, for instance) . At time t1, the UE may measure and report one or more inter-TRP phase offsets or frequency offsets. The network entity may apply a precoder for a CJT physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) at time t > t1 based on the phase offset (s) or the frequency offset (s) .
Some issues arise with utilizing a tracking reference signal (TRS) for inter-TRP frequency offset measurement. Based on a time interval of TRS (e.g., 4-symbols, or 18-symbols within 2 slots) , it is difficult to achieve accurate inter-TRP phase prediction within a PMI update period. For example, a frequency offset accuracy with a 4-symbol time interval under 30 kilohertz (kHz) subcarrier spacing may be about 10
hertz (Hz) (e.g., ±5 Hz, where a worst case may be doubled as 20 Hz or ±10 Hz for inter-TRP. In 50 milliseconds (ms) , 20 Hz may correspond to a 2π phase rotation. Within an assumed PMI report periodicity of 40 ms, the frequency offset accuracy (or one single quantization step) may correspond to (40/50) *2π = (8/5) *π, which may be too coarse to accurately update a precoder.
Some examples of the techniques described herein provide reference signaling for estimating frequency offsets between TRPs. A frequency offset may be calculated as: frequency offset × 2π = phase offset ÷ time interval. The accuracy of estimating a phase offset may be limited by noise (e.g., receiver sensitivity) , which may be difficult to improve. For 20 Hz accuracy over a time interval of 4 symbols with a subcarrier spacing of 30 kHz (e.g., (4/14) ×0.5 ms) , the phase offset accuracy may be about 2π × 20 × ( (4/14) × 0.5 × 10-3) ≈ 1°. Some approaches to enhance the phase offset accuracy may include increasing the time interval of the measurement resources. In some cases, increasing a time interval may reduce a maximum measurable un-aliased frequency. Because an inter-TRP frequency offset may be smaller than a TRP-UE frequency difference (for which a TRS may be utilized) , increasing the time interval of the measurement resources may increase measurement accuracy of the frequency. For example, a 1 part-per-billion clock frequency drift of a TRP with a center frequency fc =2 gigahertz (GHz) may result in a 4 Hz (±2 Hz) maximum inter-TRP frequency offset (assuming that the UE is on-track with one of the TRPs, for instance) . To achieve a phase accuracy of, for example, 3°×2=6° over 40 ms, and assuming that the 1° phase offset accuracy is unchanged, the time interval may be increased to about 40/6 ≈ 6.7 ms (e.g., about 13 slots at 30 kHz subcarrier spacing) . Accordingly, a reference signal pattern supporting finer frequency granularity or accuracy measurement may improve frequency offset estimation.
In some examples, reference signaling for frequency offset measurement may include N > 1 reference signal bursts, where each reference signal is associated with a quasi co-location (QCL) value (e.g., each burst may correspond to each TRP, and thus N QCL values) . Within each burst, a time interval between at least two of L CSI-RS occasions (e.g., L = 2 or 4) may be utilized for inter-burst (e.g., inter-TRP) frequency offset measurement. The time interval may be larger than a threshold (e.g., 10
or 20 slots, or larger than the 4 symbols in 2 slots of a TRS) . In some aspects, the time interval may be the same between bursts (e.g., the same for all TRPs) .
In a first reference signaling arrangement, N sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes L CSI-RSs with the same QCL value (e.g., each set corresponds to each burst and each TRP) . In some examples, the first reference signaling arrangement may be utilized with a Type-II Doppler channel measurement resource for the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RSs within a set.
In a second reference signaling arrangement, L sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes N single-port CSI-RSs with N QCL values (e.g., each set may correspond to all TRPs at an occasion group) . In some examples, the second reference signaling arrangement may be utilized with a time domain channel properties (TDCP) channel measurement resource in the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RS sets.
In a third reference signaling arrangement, one set of N single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized (e.g., each CSI-RS may correspond to each burst and each TRP, thus each having one QCL value) , where each CSI-RS is parameterized with L offsets and occurs as L CSI-RS occasions. For instance, each CSI-RS may occur L times for aperiodic CSI-RS or may occur L times per period for periodic CSI-RS.
Aspects of the disclosure are initially described in the context of wireless communications systems. Aspects of the disclosure are additionally described in the context of timing diagrams and a process flow diagram. Aspects of the disclosure are further illustrated by and described with reference to apparatus diagrams, system diagrams, and flowcharts that relate to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs.
FIG. 1 shows an example of a wireless communications system 100 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The wireless communications system 100 may include one or more devices, such as one or more network devices (e.g., network entities 105) , one or more UEs 115, and a core network 130. In some examples, the wireless communications system 100 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network,
an LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) network, an LTE-A Pro network, a New Radio (NR) network, or a network operating in accordance with other systems and radio technologies, including future systems and radio technologies not explicitly mentioned herein.
The network entities 105 may be dispersed throughout a geographic area to form the wireless communications system 100 and may include devices in different forms or having different capabilities. In various examples, a network entity 105 may be referred to as a network element, a mobility element, a radio access network (RAN) node, or network equipment, among other nomenclature. In some examples, network entities 105 and UEs 115 may wirelessly communicate via communication link (s) 125 (e.g., a radio frequency (RF) access link) . For example, a network entity 105 may support a coverage area 110 (e.g., a geographic coverage area) over which the UEs 115 and the network entity 105 may establish the communication link (s) 125. The coverage area 110 may be an example of a geographic area over which a network entity 105 and a UE 115 may support the communication of signals according to one or more radio access technologies (RATs) .
The UEs 115 may be dispersed throughout a coverage area 110 of the wireless communications system 100, and each UE 115 may be stationary, or mobile, or both at different times. The UEs 115 may be devices in different forms or having different capabilities. Some example UEs 115 are illustrated in FIG. 1. The UEs 115 described herein may be capable of supporting communications with various types of devices in the wireless communications system 100 (e.g., other wireless communication devices, including UEs 115 or network entities 105) , as shown in FIG. 1.
As described herein, a node of the wireless communications system 100, which may be referred to as a network node, or a wireless node, may be a network entity 105 (e.g., any network entity described herein) , a UE 115 (e.g., any UE described herein) , a network controller, an apparatus, a device, a computing system, one or more components, or another suitable processing entity configured to perform any of the techniques described herein. For example, a node may be a UE 115. As another example, a node may be a network entity 105. As another example, a first node may be configured to communicate with a second node or a third node. In one aspect of this example, the first node may be a UE 115, the second node may be a network entity 105,
and the third node may be a UE 115. In another aspect of this example, the first node may be a UE 115, the second node may be a network entity 105, and the third node may be a network entity 105. In yet other aspects of this example, the first, second, and third nodes may be different relative to these examples. Similarly, reference to a UE 115, network entity 105, apparatus, device, computing system, or the like may include disclosure of the UE 115, network entity 105, apparatus, device, computing system, or the like being a node. For example, disclosure that a UE 115 is configured to receive information from a network entity 105 also discloses that a first node is configured to receive information from a second node.
In some examples, network entities 105 may communicate with a core network 130, or with one another, or both. For example, network entities 105 may communicate with the core network 130 via backhaul communication link (s) 120 (e.g., in accordance with an S1, N2, N3, or other interface protocol) . In some examples, network entities 105 may communicate with one another via backhaul communication link (s) 120 (e.g., in accordance with an X2, Xn, or other interface protocol) either directly (e.g., directly between network entities 105) or indirectly (e.g., via the core network 130) . In some examples, network entities 105 may communicate with one another via a midhaul communication link 162 (e.g., in accordance with a midhaul interface protocol) or a fronthaul communication link 168 (e.g., in accordance with a fronthaul interface protocol) , or any combination thereof. The backhaul communication link (s) 120, midhaul communication links 162, or fronthaul communication links 168 may be or include one or more wired links (e.g., an electrical link, an optical fiber link) or one or more wireless links (e.g., a radio link, a wireless optical link) , among other examples or various combinations thereof. A UE 115 may communicate with the core network 130 via a communication link 155.
One or more of the network entities 105 or network equipment described herein may include or may be referred to as a base station 140 (e.g., a base transceiver station, a radio base station, an NR base station, an access point, a radio transceiver, a NodeB, an eNodeB (eNB) , a next-generation NodeB or giga-NodeB (either of which may be referred to as a gNB) , a 5G NB, a next-generation eNB (ng-eNB) , a Home NodeB, a Home eNodeB, or other suitable terminology) . In some examples, a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140) may be implemented in an aggregated (e.g.,
monolithic, standalone) base station architecture, which may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically integrated within one network entity (e.g., a network entity 105 or a single RAN node, such as a base station 140) .
In some examples, a network entity 105 may be implemented in a disaggregated architecture (e.g., a disaggregated base station architecture, a disaggregated RAN architecture) , which may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically distributed among multiple network entities (e.g., network entities 105) , such as an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) network, an open RAN (O-RAN) (e.g., a network configuration sponsored by the O-RAN Alliance) , or a virtualized RAN (vRAN) (e.g., a cloud RAN (C-RAN) ) . For example, a network entity 105 may include one or more of a central unit (CU) , such as a CU 160, a distributed unit (DU) , such as a DU 165, a radio unit (RU) , such as an RU 170, a RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) , such as an RIC 175 (e.g., a Near-Real Time RIC (Near-RT RIC) , a Non-Real Time RIC (Non-RT RIC) ) , a Service Management and Orchestration (SMO) system, such as an SMO system 180, or any combination thereof. An RU 170 may also be referred to as a radio head, a smart radio head, a remote radio head (RRH) , a remote radio unit (RRU) , or a transmission reception point (TRP) . One or more components of the network entities 105 in a disaggregated RAN architecture may be co-located, or one or more components of the network entities 105 may be located in distributed locations (e.g., separate physical locations) . In some examples, one or more of the network entities 105 of a disaggregated RAN architecture may be implemented as virtual units (e.g., a virtual CU (VCU) , a virtual DU (VDU) , a virtual RU (VRU) ) .
The split of functionality between a CU 160, a DU 165, and an RU 170 is flexible and may support different functionalities depending on which functions (e.g., network layer functions, protocol layer functions, baseband functions, RF functions, or any combinations thereof) are performed at a CU 160, a DU 165, or an RU 170. For example, a functional split of a protocol stack may be employed between a CU 160 and a DU 165 such that the CU 160 may support one or more layers of the protocol stack and the DU 165 may support one or more different layers of the protocol stack. In some examples, the CU 160 may host upper protocol layer (e.g., layer 3 (L3) , layer 2 (L2) ) functionality and signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) , service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) , Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) ) . The CU 160
(e.g., one or more CUs) may be connected to a DU 165 (e.g., one or more DUs) or an RU 170 (e.g., one or more RUs) , or some combination thereof, and the DUs 165, RUs 170, or both may host lower protocol layers, such as layer 1 (L1) (e.g., physical (PHY) layer) or L2 (e.g., radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer) functionality and signaling, and may each be at least partially controlled by the CU 160. Additionally, or alternatively, a functional split of the protocol stack may be employed between a DU 165 and an RU 170 such that the DU 165 may support one or more layers of the protocol stack and the RU 170 may support one or more different layers of the protocol stack. The DU 165 may support one or multiple different cells (e.g., via one or multiple different RUs, such as an RU 170) . In some cases, a functional split between a CU 160 and a DU 165 or between a DU 165 and an RU 170 may be within a protocol layer (e.g., some functions for a protocol layer may be performed by one of a CU 160, a DU 165, or an RU 170, while other functions of the protocol layer are performed by a different one of the CU 160, the DU 165, or the RU 170) . A CU 160 may be functionally split further into CU control plane (CU-CP) and CU user plane (CU-UP) functions. A CU 160 may be connected to a DU 165 via a midhaul communication link 162 (e.g., F1, F1-c, F1-u) , and a DU 165 may be connected to an RU 170 via a fronthaul communication link 168 (e.g., open fronthaul (FH) interface) . In some examples, a midhaul communication link 162 or a fronthaul communication link 168 may be implemented in accordance with an interface (e.g., a channel) between layers of a protocol stack supported by respective network entities (e.g., one or more of the network entities 105) that are in communication via such communication links.
In some wireless communications systems (e.g., the wireless communications system 100) , infrastructure and spectral resources for radio access may support wireless backhaul link capabilities to supplement wired backhaul connections, providing an IAB network architecture (e.g., to a core network 130) . In some cases, in an IAB network, one or more of the network entities 105 (e.g., network entities 105 or IAB node (s) 104) may be partially controlled by each other. The IAB node (s) 104 may be referred to as a donor entity or an IAB donor. A DU 165 or an RU 170 may be partially controlled by a CU 160 associated with a network entity 105 or base station 140 (such as a donor network entity or a donor base station) . The one or more donor entities (e.g., IAB donors) may be in communication with one or more additional
devices (e.g., IAB node (s) 104) via supported access and backhaul links (e.g., backhaul communication link (s) 120) . IAB node (s) 104 may include an IAB mobile termination (IAB-MT) controlled (e.g., scheduled) by one or more DUs (e.g., DUs 165) of a coupled IAB donor. An IAB-MT may be equipped with an independent set of antennas for relay of communications with UEs 115 or may share the same antennas (e.g., of an RU 170) of IAB node (s) 104 used for access via the DU 165 of the IAB node (s) 104 (e.g., referred to as virtual IAB-MT (vIAB-MT) ) . In some examples, the IAB node (s) 104 may include one or more DUs (e.g., DUs 165) that support communication links with additional entities (e.g., IAB node (s) 104, UEs 115) within the relay chain or configuration of the access network (e.g., downstream) . In such cases, one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture (e.g., the IAB node (s) 104 or components of the IAB node (s) 104) may be configured to operate according to the techniques described herein.
For instance, an access network (AN) or RAN may include communications between access nodes (e.g., an IAB donor) , IAB node (s) 104, and one or more UEs 115. The IAB donor may facilitate connection between the core network 130 and the AN (e.g., via a wired or wireless connection to the core network 130) . That is, an IAB donor may refer to a RAN node with a wired or wireless connection to the core network 130. The IAB donor may include one or more of a CU 160, a DU 165, and an RU 170, in which case the CU 160 may communicate with the core network 130 via an interface (e.g., a backhaul link) . The IAB donor and IAB node (s) 104 may communicate via an F1 interface according to a protocol that defines signaling messages (e.g., an F1 AP protocol) . Additionally, or alternatively, the CU 160 may communicate with the core network 130 via an interface, which may be an example of a portion of a backhaul link, and may communicate with other CUs (e.g., including a CU 160 associated with an alternative IAB donor) via an Xn-C interface, which may be an example of another portion of a backhaul link.
IAB node (s) 104 may refer to RAN nodes that provide IAB functionality (e.g., access for UEs 115, wireless self-backhauling capabilities) . A DU 165 may act as a distributed scheduling node towards child nodes associated with the IAB node (s) 104, and the IAB-MT may act as a scheduled node towards parent nodes associated with IAB node (s) 104. That is, an IAB donor may be referred to as a parent node in
communication with one or more child nodes (e.g., an IAB donor may relay transmissions for UEs through other IAB node (s) 104) . Additionally, or alternatively, IAB node (s) 104 may also be referred to as parent nodes or child nodes to other IAB node (s) 104, depending on the relay chain or configuration of the AN. The IAB-MT entity of IAB node (s) 104 may provide a Uu interface for a child IAB node (e.g., the IAB node (s) 104) to receive signaling from a parent IAB node (e.g., the IAB node (s) 104) , and a DU interface (e.g., a DU 165) may provide a Uu interface for a parent IAB node to signal to a child IAB node or UE 115.
For example, IAB node (s) 104 may be referred to as parent nodes that support communications for child IAB nodes, or may be referred to as child IAB nodes associated with IAB donors, or both. An IAB donor may include a CU 160 with a wired or wireless connection (e.g., backhaul communication link (s) 120) to the core network 130 and may act as a parent node to IAB node (s) 104. For example, the DU 165 of an IAB donor may relay transmissions to UEs 115 through IAB node (s) 104, or may directly signal transmissions to a UE 115, or both. The CU 160 of the IAB donor may signal communication link establishment via an F1 interface to IAB node (s) 104, and the IAB node (s) 104 may schedule transmissions (e.g., transmissions to the UEs 115 relayed from the IAB donor) through one or more DUs (e.g., DUs 165) . That is, data may be relayed to and from IAB node (s) 104 via signaling via an NR Uu interface to MT of IAB node (s) 104 (e.g., other IAB node (s) ) . Communications with IAB node (s) 104 may be scheduled by a DU 165 of the IAB donor or of IAB node (s) 104.
In the case of the techniques described herein applied in the context of a disaggregated RAN architecture, one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture may be configured to support test as described herein. For example, some operations described as being performed by a UE 115 or a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140) may additionally, or alternatively, be performed by one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture (e.g., components such as an IAB node, a DU 165, a CU 160, an RU 170, an RIC 175, an SMO system 180) .
A UE 115 may include or may be referred to as a mobile device, a wireless device, a remote device, a handheld device, or a subscriber device, or some other suitable terminology, where the “device” may also be referred to as a unit, a station, a terminal, or a client, among other examples. A UE 115 may also include or may be
referred to as a personal electronic device such as a cellular phone, a personal digital assistant (PDA) , a tablet computer, a laptop computer, or a personal computer. In some examples, a UE 115 may include or be referred to as a wireless local loop (WLL) station, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, an Internet of Everything (IoE) device, or a machine type communications (MTC) device, among other examples, which may be implemented in various objects such as appliances, vehicles, or meters, among other examples.
The UEs 115 described herein may be able to communicate with various types of devices, such as UEs 115 that may sometimes operate as relays, as well as the network entities 105 and the network equipment including macro eNBs or gNBs, small cell eNBs or gNBs, or relay base stations, among other examples, as shown in FIG. 1.
The UEs 115 and the network entities 105 may wirelessly communicate with one another via the communication link (s) 125 (e.g., one or more access links) using resources associated with one or more carriers. The term “carrier” may refer to a set of RF spectrum resources having a defined PHY layer structure for supporting the communication link (s) 125. For example, a carrier used for the communication link (s) 125 may include a portion of an RF spectrum band (e.g., a bandwidth part (BWP) ) that is operated according to one or more PHY layer channels for a given RAT (e.g., LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, NR) . Each PHY layer channel may carry acquisition signaling (e.g., synchronization signals, system information) , control signaling that coordinates operation for the carrier, user data, or other signaling. The wireless communications system 100 may support communication with a UE 115 using carrier aggregation or multi-carrier operation. A UE 115 may be configured with multiple downlink component carriers and one or more uplink component carriers according to a carrier aggregation configuration. Carrier aggregation may be used with both frequency division duplexing (FDD) and time division duplexing (TDD) component carriers. Communication between a network entity 105 and other devices may refer to communication between the devices and any portion (e.g., entity, sub-entity) of a network entity 105. For example, the terms “transmitting, ” “receiving, ” or “communicating, ” when referring to a network entity 105, may refer to any portion of a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, a CU 160, a DU 165, a RU 170) of a RAN
communicating with another device (e.g., directly or via one or more other network entities, such as one or more of the network entities 105) .
In some examples, such as in a carrier aggregation configuration, a carrier may have acquisition signaling or control signaling that coordinates operations for other carriers. A carrier may be associated with a frequency channel (e.g., an evolved universal mobile telecommunication system terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) absolute RF channel number (EARFCN) ) and may be identified according to a channel raster for discovery by the UEs 115. A carrier may be operated in a standalone mode, in which case initial acquisition and connection may be conducted by the UEs 115 via the carrier, or the carrier may be operated in a non-standalone mode, in which case a connection is anchored using a different carrier (e.g., of the same or a different RAT) .
The communication link (s) 125 of the wireless communications system 100 may include downlink transmissions (e.g., forward link transmissions) from a network entity 105 to a UE 115, uplink transmissions (e.g., return link transmissions) from a UE 115 to a network entity 105, or both, among other configurations of transmissions. Carriers may carry downlink or uplink communications (e.g., in an FDD mode) or may be configured to carry downlink and uplink communications (e.g., in a TDD mode) .
A carrier may be associated with a particular bandwidth of the RF spectrum and, in some examples, the carrier bandwidth may be referred to as a “system bandwidth” of the carrier or the wireless communications system 100. For example, the carrier bandwidth may be one of a set of bandwidths for carriers of a particular RAT (e.g., 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 40, or 80 megahertz (MHz) ) . Devices of the wireless communications system 100 (e.g., the network entities 105, the UEs 115, or both) may have hardware configurations that support communications using a particular carrier bandwidth or may be configurable to support communications using one of a set of carrier bandwidths. In some examples, the wireless communications system 100 may include network entities 105 or UEs 115 that support concurrent communications using carriers associated with multiple carrier bandwidths. In some examples, each served UE 115 may be configured for operating using portions (e.g., a sub-band, a BWP) or all of a carrier bandwidth.
Signal waveforms transmitted via a carrier may be made up of multiple subcarriers (e.g., using multi-carrier modulation (MCM) techniques such as orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) or discrete Fourier transform spread OFDM (DFT-S-OFDM) ) . In a system employing MCM techniques, a resource element may refer to resources of one symbol period (e.g., a duration of one modulation symbol) and one subcarrier, in which case the symbol period and subcarrier spacing may be inversely related. The quantity of bits carried by each resource element may depend on the modulation scheme (e.g., the order of the modulation scheme, the coding rate of the modulation scheme, or both) , such that a relatively higher quantity of resource elements (e.g., in a transmission duration) and a relatively higher order of a modulation scheme may correspond to a relatively higher rate of communication. A wireless communications resource may refer to a combination of an RF spectrum resource, a time resource, and a spatial resource (e.g., a spatial layer, a beam) , and the use of multiple spatial resources may increase the data rate or data integrity for communications with a UE 115.
One or more numerologies for a carrier may be supported, and a numerology may include a subcarrier spacing (Δf) and a cyclic prefix. A carrier may be divided into one or more BWPs having the same or different numerologies. In some examples, a UE 115 may be configured with multiple BWPs. In some examples, a single BWP for a carrier may be active at a given time and communications for the UE 115 may be restricted to one or more active BWPs.
The time intervals for the network entities 105 or the UEs 115 may be expressed in multiples of a basic time unit which may, for example, refer to a sampling period of Ts=1/ (Δfmax·Nf) seconds, for which Δfmax may represent a supported subcarrier spacing, and Nf may represent a supported discrete Fourier transform (DFT) size. Time intervals of a communications resource may be organized according to radio frames each having a specified duration (e.g., 10 milliseconds (ms) ) . Each radio frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN) (e.g., ranging from 0 to 1023) .
Each frame may include multiple consecutively-numbered subframes or slots, and each subframe or slot may have the same duration. In some examples, a frame may be divided (e.g., in the time domain) into subframes, and each subframe may be
further divided into a quantity of slots. Alternatively, each frame may include a variable quantity of slots, and the quantity of slots may depend on subcarrier spacing. Each slot may include a quantity of symbol periods (e.g., depending on the length of the cyclic prefix prepended to each symbol period) . In some wireless communications systems, such as the wireless communications system 100, a slot may further be divided into multiple mini-slots associated with one or more symbols. Excluding the cyclic prefix, each symbol period may be associated with one or more (e.g., Nf) sampling periods. The duration of a symbol period may depend on the subcarrier spacing or frequency band of operation.
A subframe, a slot, a mini-slot, or a symbol may be the smallest scheduling unit (e.g., in the time domain) of the wireless communications system 100 and may be referred to as a transmission time interval (TTI) . In some examples, the TTI duration (e.g., a quantity of symbol periods in a TTI) may be variable. Additionally, or alternatively, the smallest scheduling unit of the wireless communications system 100 may be dynamically selected (e.g., in bursts of shortened TTIs (sTTIs) ) .
Physical channels may be multiplexed for communication using a carrier according to various techniques. A physical control channel and a physical data channel may be multiplexed for signaling via a downlink carrier, for example, using one or more of time division multiplexing (TDM) techniques, frequency division multiplexing (FDM) techniques, or hybrid TDM-FDM techniques. A control region (e.g., a control resource set (CORESET) ) for a physical control channel may be defined by a set of symbol periods and may extend across the system bandwidth or a subset of the system bandwidth of the carrier. One or more control regions (e.g., CORESETs) may be configured for a set of the UEs 115. For example, one or more of the UEs 115 may monitor or search control regions for control information according to one or more search space sets, and each search space set may include one or multiple control channel candidates in one or more aggregation levels arranged in a cascaded manner. An aggregation level for a control channel candidate may refer to an amount of control channel resources (e.g., control channel elements (CCEs) ) associated with encoded information for a control information format having a given payload size. Search space sets may include common search space sets configured for sending control information
to UEs 115 (e.g., one or more UEs) or may include UE-specific search space sets for sending control information to a UE 115 (e.g., a specific UE) .
A network entity 105 may provide communication coverage via one or more cells, for example a macro cell, a small cell, a hot spot, or other types of cells, or any combination thereof. The term “cell” may refer to a logical communication entity used for communication with a network entity 105 (e.g., using a carrier) and may be associated with an identifier for distinguishing neighboring cells (e.g., a physical cell identifier (PCID) , a virtual cell identifier (VCID) ) . In some examples, a cell also may refer to a coverage area 110 or a portion of a coverage area 110 (e.g., a sector) over which the logical communication entity operates. Such cells may range from smaller areas (e.g., a structure, a subset of structure) to larger areas depending on various factors such as the capabilities of the network entity 105. For example, a cell may be or include a building, a subset of a building, or exterior spaces between or overlapping with coverage areas 110, among other examples.
A macro cell generally covers a relatively large geographic area (e.g., several kilometers in radius) and may allow unrestricted access by the UEs 115 with service subscriptions with the network provider supporting the macro cell. A small cell may be associated with a network entity 105 operating with lower power (e.g., a base station 140 operating with lower power) relative to a macro cell, and a small cell may operate using the same or different (e.g., licensed, unlicensed) frequency bands as macro cells. Small cells may provide unrestricted access to the UEs 115 with service subscriptions with the network provider or may provide restricted access to the UEs 115 having an association with the small cell (e.g., the UEs 115 in a closed subscriber group (CSG) , the UEs 115 associated with users in a home or office) . A network entity 105 may support one or more cells and may also support communications via the one or more cells using one or multiple component carriers.
In some examples, a carrier may support multiple cells, and different cells may be configured according to different protocol types (e.g., MTC, narrowband IoT (NB-IoT) , enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB) ) that may provide access for different types of devices.
In some examples, a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) may be movable and therefore provide communication coverage for a moving coverage area, such as the coverage area 110. In some examples, coverage areas 110 (e.g., different coverage areas) associated with different technologies may overlap, but the coverage areas 110 (e.g., different coverage areas) may be supported by the same network entity (e.g., a network entity 105) . In some other examples, overlapping coverage areas, such as a coverage area 110, associated with different technologies may be supported by different network entities (e.g., the network entities 105) . The wireless communications system 100 may include, for example, a heterogeneous network in which different types of the network entities 105 support communications for coverage areas 110 (e.g., different coverage areas) using the same or different RATs.
The wireless communications system 100 may support synchronous or asynchronous operation. For synchronous operation, network entities 105 (e.g., base stations 140) may have similar frame timings, and transmissions from different network entities (e.g., different ones of the network entities 105) may be approximately aligned in time. For asynchronous operation, network entities 105 may have different frame timings, and transmissions from different network entities (e.g., different ones of network entities 105) may, in some examples, not be aligned in time. The techniques described herein may be used for either synchronous or asynchronous operations.
Some UEs 115, such as MTC or IoT devices, may be relatively low cost or low complexity devices and may provide for automated communication between machines (e.g., via Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communication) . M2M communication or MTC may refer to data communication technologies that allow devices to communicate with one another or a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140) without human intervention. In some examples, M2M communication or MTC may include communications from devices that integrate sensors or meters to measure or capture information and relay such information to a central server or application program that uses the information or presents the information to humans interacting with the application program. Some UEs 115 may be designed to collect information or enable automated behavior of machines or other devices. Examples of applications for MTC devices include smart metering, inventory monitoring, water level monitoring, equipment monitoring, healthcare monitoring, wildlife monitoring, weather and
geological event monitoring, fleet management and tracking, remote security sensing, physical access control, and transaction-based business charging.
Some UEs 115 may be configured to employ operating modes that reduce power consumption, such as half-duplex communications (e.g., a mode that supports one-way communication via transmission or reception, but not transmission and reception concurrently) . In some examples, half-duplex communications may be performed at a reduced peak rate. Other power conservation techniques for the UEs 115 may include entering a power saving deep sleep mode when not engaging in active communications, operating using a limited bandwidth (e.g., according to narrowband communications) , or a combination of these techniques. For example, some UEs 115 may be configured for operation using a narrowband protocol type that is associated with a defined portion or range (e.g., set of subcarriers or resource blocks (RBs) ) within a carrier, within a guard-band of a carrier, or outside of a carrier.
The wireless communications system 100 may be configured to support ultra-reliable communications or low-latency communications, or various combinations thereof. For example, the wireless communications system 100 may be configured to support ultra-reliable low-latency communications (URLLC) . The UEs 115 may be designed to support ultra-reliable, low-latency, or critical functions. Ultra-reliable communications may include private communication or group communication and may be supported by one or more services such as push-to-talk, video, or data. Support for ultra-reliable, low-latency functions may include prioritization of services, and such services may be used for public safety or general commercial applications. The terms ultra-reliable, low-latency, and ultra-reliable low-latency may be used interchangeably herein.
In some examples, a UE 115 may be configured to support communicating directly with other UEs (e.g., one or more of the UEs 115) via a device-to-device (D2D) communication link, such as a D2D communication link 135 (e.g., in accordance with a peer-to-peer (P2P) , D2D, or sidelink protocol) . In some examples, one or more UEs 115 of a group that are performing D2D communications may be within the coverage area 110 of a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) , which may support aspects of such D2D communications being configured by (e.g., scheduled by) the network entity 105. In some examples, one or more UEs 115 of such a group may be
outside the coverage area 110 of a network entity 105 or may be otherwise unable to or not configured to receive transmissions from a network entity 105. In some examples, groups of the UEs 115 communicating via D2D communications may support a one-to-many (1: M) system in which each UE 115 transmits to one or more of the UEs 115 in the group. In some examples, a network entity 105 may facilitate the scheduling of resources for D2D communications. In some other examples, D2D communications may be carried out between the UEs 115 without an involvement of a network entity 105.
In some systems, a D2D communication link 135 may be an example of a communication channel, such as a sidelink communication channel, between vehicles (e.g., UEs 115) . In some examples, vehicles may communicate using vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communications, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communications, or some combination of these. A vehicle may signal information related to traffic conditions, signal scheduling, weather, safety, emergencies, or any other information relevant to a V2X system. In some examples, vehicles in a V2X system may communicate with roadside infrastructure, such as roadside units, or with the network via one or more network nodes (e.g., network entities 105, base stations 140, RUs 170) using vehicle-to-network (V2N) communications, or with both.
The core network 130 may provide user authentication, access authorization, tracking, Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity, and other access, routing, or mobility functions. The core network 130 may be an evolved packet core (EPC) or 5G core (5GC) , which may include at least one control plane entity that manages access and mobility (e.g., a mobility management entity (MME) , an access and mobility management function (AMF) ) and at least one user plane entity that routes packets or interconnects to external networks (e.g., a serving gateway (S-GW) , a Packet Data Network (PDN) gateway (P-GW) , or a user plane function (UPF) ) . The control plane entity may manage non-access stratum (NAS) functions such as mobility, authentication, and bearer management for the UEs 115 served by the network entities 105 (e.g., base stations 140) associated with the core network 130. User IP packets may be transferred through the user plane entity, which may provide IP address allocation as well as other functions. The user plane entity may be connected to IP services 150 for one or more network operators. The IP services 150 may include access to the Internet,
Intranet (s) , an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) , or a Packet-Switched Streaming Service.
The wireless communications system 100 may operate using one or more frequency bands, which may be in the range of 300 megahertz (MHz) to 300 gigahertz (GHz) . Generally, the region from 300 MHz to 3 GHz is known as the ultra-high frequency (UHF) region or decimeter band because the wavelengths range from approximately one decimeter to one meter in length. UHF waves may be blocked or redirected by buildings and environmental features, which may be referred to as clusters, but the waves may penetrate structures sufficiently for a macro cell to provide service to the UEs 115 located indoors. Communications using UHF waves may be associated with smaller antennas and shorter ranges (e.g., less than one hundred kilometers) compared to communications using the smaller frequencies and longer waves of the high frequency (HF) or very high frequency (VHF) portion of the spectrum below 300 MHz.
The wireless communications system 100 may also operate using a super high frequency (SHF) region, which may be in the range of 3 GHz to 30 GHz, also known as the centimeter band, or using an extremely high frequency (EHF) region of the spectrum (e.g., from 30 GHz to 300 GHz) , also known as the millimeter band. In some examples, the wireless communications system 100 may support millimeter wave (mmW) communications between the UEs 115 and the network entities 105 (e.g., base stations 140, RUs 170) , and EHF antennas of the respective devices may be smaller and more closely spaced than UHF antennas. In some examples, such techniques may facilitate using antenna arrays within a device. The propagation of EHF transmissions, however, may be subject to even greater attenuation and shorter range than SHF or UHF transmissions. The techniques disclosed herein may be employed across transmissions that use one or more different frequency regions, and designated use of bands across these frequency regions may differ by country or regulating body.
The wireless communications system 100 may utilize both licensed and unlicensed RF spectrum bands. For example, the wireless communications system 100 may employ License Assisted Access (LAA) , LTE-Unlicensed (LTE-U) RAT, or NR technology using an unlicensed band such as the 5 GHz industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) band. While operating using unlicensed RF spectrum bands, devices
such as the network entities 105 and the UEs 115 may employ carrier sensing for collision detection and avoidance. In some examples, operations using unlicensed bands may be based on a carrier aggregation configuration in conjunction with component carriers operating using a licensed band (e.g., LAA) . Operations using unlicensed spectrum may include downlink transmissions, uplink transmissions, P2P transmissions, or D2D transmissions, among other examples.
A network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) or a UE 115 may be equipped with multiple antennas, which may be used to employ techniques such as transmit diversity, receive diversity, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communications, or beamforming. The antennas of a network entity 105 or a UE 115 may be located within one or more antenna arrays or antenna panels, which may support MIMO operations or transmit or receive beamforming. For example, one or more base station antennas or antenna arrays may be co-located at an antenna assembly, such as an antenna tower. In some examples, antennas or antenna arrays associated with a network entity 105 may be located at diverse geographic locations. A network entity 105 may include an antenna array with a set of rows and columns of antenna ports that the network entity 105 may use to support beamforming of communications with a UE 115. Likewise, a UE 115 may include one or more antenna arrays that may support various MIMO or beamforming operations. Additionally, or alternatively, an antenna panel may support RF beamforming for a signal transmitted via an antenna port.
The network entities 105 or the UEs 115 may use MIMO communications to exploit multipath signal propagation and increase spectral efficiency by transmitting or receiving multiple signals via different spatial layers. Such techniques may be referred to as spatial multiplexing. The multiple signals may, for example, be transmitted by the transmitting device via different antennas or different combinations of antennas. Likewise, the multiple signals may be received by the receiving device via different antennas or different combinations of antennas. Each of the multiple signals may be referred to as a separate spatial stream and may carry information associated with the same data stream (e.g., the same codeword) or different data streams (e.g., different codewords) . Different spatial layers may be associated with different antenna ports used for channel measurement and reporting. MIMO techniques include single-user MIMO (SU-MIMO) , for which multiple spatial layers are transmitted to the same receiving
device, and multiple-user MIMO (MU-MIMO) , for which multiple spatial layers are transmitted to multiple devices.
Beamforming, which may also be referred to as spatial filtering, directional transmission, or directional reception, is a signal processing technique that may be used at a transmitting device or a receiving device (e.g., a network entity 105, a UE 115) to shape or steer an antenna beam (e.g., a transmit beam, a receive beam) along a spatial path between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Beamforming may be achieved by combining the signals communicated via antenna elements of an antenna array such that some signals propagating along particular orientations with respect to an antenna array experience constructive interference while others experience destructive interference. The adjustment of signals communicated via the antenna elements may include a transmitting device or a receiving device applying amplitude offsets, phase offsets, or both to signals carried via the antenna elements associated with the device. The adjustments associated with each of the antenna elements may be defined by a beamforming weight set associated with a particular orientation (e.g., with respect to the antenna array of the transmitting device or receiving device, or with respect to some other orientation) .
A network entity 105 or a UE 115 may use beam sweeping techniques as part of beamforming operations. For example, a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) may use multiple antennas or antenna arrays (e.g., antenna panels) to conduct beamforming operations for directional communications with a UE 115. Some signals (e.g., synchronization signals, reference signals, beam selection signals, or other control signals) may be transmitted by a network entity 105 multiple times along different directions. For example, the network entity 105 may transmit a signal according to different beamforming weight sets associated with different directions of transmission. Transmissions along different beam directions may be used to identify (e.g., by a transmitting device, such as a network entity 105, or by a receiving device, such as a UE 115) a beam direction for later transmission or reception by the network entity 105.
Some signals, such as data signals associated with a particular receiving device, may be transmitted by a transmitting device (e.g., a network entity 105 or a UE 115) along a single beam direction (e.g., a direction associated with the receiving
device, such as another network entity 105 or UE 115) . In some examples, the beam direction associated with transmissions along a single beam direction may be determined based on a signal that was transmitted along one or more beam directions. For example, a UE 115 may receive one or more of the signals transmitted by the network entity 105 along different directions and may report to the network entity 105 an indication of the signal that the UE 115 received with a highest signal quality or an otherwise acceptable signal quality.
In some examples, transmissions by a device (e.g., by a network entity 105 or a UE 115) may be performed using multiple beam directions, and the device may use a combination of digital precoding or beamforming to generate a combined beam for transmission (e.g., from a network entity 105 to a UE 115) . The UE 115 may report feedback that indicates precoding weights for one or more beam directions, and the feedback may correspond to a configured set of beams across a system bandwidth or one or more sub-bands. The network entity 105 may transmit a reference signal (e.g., a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) , a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) ) , which may be precoded or unprecoded. The UE 115 may provide feedback for beam selection, which may be a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) or codebook-based feedback (e.g., a multi-panel type codebook, a linear combination type codebook, a port selection type codebook) . Although these techniques are described with reference to signals transmitted along one or more directions by a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) , a UE 115 may employ similar techniques for transmitting signals multiple times along different directions (e.g., for identifying a beam direction for subsequent transmission or reception by the UE 115) or for transmitting a signal along a single direction (e.g., for transmitting data to a receiving device) .
A receiving device (e.g., a UE 115) may perform reception operations in accordance with multiple receive configurations (e.g., directional listening) when receiving various signals from a transmitting device (e.g., a network entity 105) , such as synchronization signals, reference signals, beam selection signals, or other control signals. For example, a receiving device may perform reception in accordance with multiple receive directions by receiving via different antenna subarrays, by processing received signals according to different antenna subarrays, by receiving according to different receive beamforming weight sets (e.g., different directional listening weight
sets) applied to signals received at multiple antenna elements of an antenna array, or by processing received signals according to different receive beamforming weight sets applied to signals received at multiple antenna elements of an antenna array, any of which may be referred to as “listening” according to different receive configurations or receive directions. In some examples, a receiving device may use a single receive configuration to receive along a single beam direction (e.g., when receiving a data signal) . The single receive configuration may be aligned along a beam direction determined based on listening according to different receive configuration directions (e.g., a beam direction determined to have a highest signal strength, highest signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) , or otherwise acceptable signal quality based on listening according to multiple beam directions) .
The wireless communications system 100 may be a packet-based network that operates according to a layered protocol stack. In the user plane, communications at the bearer or PDCP layer may be IP-based. An RLC layer may perform packet segmentation and reassembly to communicate via logical channels. A MAC layer may perform priority handling and multiplexing of logical channels into transport channels. The MAC layer also may implement error detection techniques, error correction techniques, or both to support retransmissions to improve link efficiency. In the control plane, an RRC layer may provide establishment, configuration, and maintenance of an RRC connection between a UE 115 and a network entity 105 or a core network 130 supporting radio bearers for user plane data. A PHY layer may map transport channels to physical channels.
The UEs 115 and the network entities 105 may support retransmissions of data to increase the likelihood that data is received successfully. Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedback is one technique for increasing the likelihood that data is received correctly via a communication link (e.g., the communication link (s) 125, a D2D communication link 135) . HARQ may include a combination of error detection (e.g., using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) ) , forward error correction (FEC) , and retransmission (e.g., automatic repeat request (ARQ) ) . HARQ may improve throughput at the MAC layer in relatively poor radio conditions (e.g., low signal-to-noise conditions) . In some examples, a device may support same-slot HARQ feedback, in which case the device may provide HARQ feedback in a specific slot for data received
via a previous symbol in the slot. In some other examples, the device may provide HARQ feedback in a subsequent slot, or according to some other time interval.
Some wireless communications systems (e.g., the wireless communications system 100) perform MIMO communications. To enhance MIMO communications, precoding may be performed to communicate data streams via multiple layers or to control beamforming. In some approaches, a network entity 105 may transmit reference signals (e.g., CSI-RSs) to a UE 115. The UE 115 may utilize the reference signals to determine a PMI, which may be transmitted to the network entity 105 for use in precoding. Transmitting a full PMI may consume a relatively large amount of resources for communication. To reduce resource consumption, phase offsets or frequency offsets may be determined by the UE 115 and transmitted to the network entity 105 instead of a full PMI. The network entity 105 may utilize the phase offsets or frequency offsets to adjust precoding.
In some approaches, the UE 115 may measure N CSI-RSs at time t0 (transmitted by N TRPs, for example) and may report the PMI for CJT. Based on the reported PMI, the network entity 105 may derive an inter-TRP phase offset (s) (by averaging across all ports of a pair of TRPs, for instance) . At time t1, the UE 115 may measure and report one or more inter-TRP phase offsets or frequency offsets. The network entity 105 may apply a precoder for a CJT PDSCH at time t > t1 based on the phase offset (s) or the frequency offset (s) .
Some issues arise with utilizing a TRS for inter-TRP frequency offset measurement. Based on a time interval of TRS (e.g., 4-symbols, or 18-symbols within 2 slots) , it is difficult to achieve accurate inter-TRP phase prediction within a PMI update period. For example, a frequency offset accuracy with a 4-symbol time interval under 30 kilohertz (kHz) subcarrier spacing may be about 10 Hz (e.g., ±5 Hz, where a worst case may be doubled as 20 Hz or ±10 Hz for inter-TRP. In 50 ms, 20 Hz may correspond to a 2π phase rotation. Within an assumed PMI report periodicity of 40 ms, the frequency offset accuracy (or one single quantization step) may correspond to (40/50) *2π = (8/5) *π, which may be too coarse to accurately update a precoder.
Some examples of the techniques described herein provide reference signaling for estimating frequency offsets between TRPs. A frequency offset may be
calculated as: frequency offset × 2π = phase offset ÷ time interval. The accuracy of estimating a phase offset may be limited by noise (e.g., receiver sensitivity) , which may be difficult to improve. For 20 Hz accuracy over a time interval of 4 symbols with a subcarrier spacing of 30 kHz (e.g., (4/14) ×0.5 ms) , the phase offset accuracy may be about 2π × 20 × ( (4/14) × 0.5 × 10-3) ≈ 1°. Some approaches to enhance the phase offset accuracy may include increasing the time interval of the measurement resources. In some cases, a longer time interval may lower a maximum measurable un-aliased frequency. Because an inter-TRP frequency offset may be smaller than a TRP-UE frequency difference (for which a TRS may be utilized) , increasing the time interval of the measurement resources may improve measurement accuracy. For example, a 1 part-per-billion clock frequency drift of a TRP with a center frequency fc = 2 GHz may result in a 4 Hz (±2 Hz) maximum inter-TRP frequency offset (assuming that the UE is on-track with one of the TRPs, for instance) . To achieve a phase accuracy of, for example, 3°×2=6° over 40 ms, and assuming that the 1° phase offset accuracy is unchanged, the time interval may be increased to about 40/6 ≈ 6.7 ms (e.g., about 13 slots at 30 kHz subcarrier spacing) . Accordingly, a reference signal pattern supporting finer frequency granularity or accuracy measurement may improve frequency offset estimation.
In some examples, reference signaling for frequency offset measurement may include N > 1 reference signal bursts, where each reference signal is associated with a QCL value (e.g., each burst may correspond to each TRP, and thus N QCL values) . Within each burst, a time interval between at least two of L CSI-RS occasions (e.g., L = 2 or 4) may be utilized for inter-burst (e.g., inter-TRP) frequency offset measurement. The time interval may be larger than a threshold (e.g., 10 or 20 slots, or larger than the 4 symbols in 2 slots of a TRS) . In some aspects, the time interval may be the same between bursts (e.g., the same for all TRPs) .
In a first reference signaling arrangement, N sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes L CSI-RSs with the same QCL value (e.g., each set corresponds to each burst and each TRP) . In some examples, the first reference signaling arrangement may be utilized with a Type-II Doppler channel measurement resource for the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RSs within a set.
In a second reference signaling arrangement, L sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes N single-port CSI-RSs with N QCL values (e.g., each set may correspond to all TRPs at an occasion group) . In some examples, the second reference signaling arrangement may be utilized with a TDCP channel measurement resource in the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RS sets.
In a third reference signaling arrangement, one set of N single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized (e.g., each CSI-RS may correspond to each burst and each TRP, thus each having one QCL value) , where each CSI-RS is parameterized with L offsets and occurs as L CSI-RS occasions. For instance, each CSI-RS may occur L times for aperiodic CSI-RS or may occur L times per period for periodic CSI-RS.
FIG. 2 shows an example of a network architecture 200 (e.g., a disaggregated base station architecture, a disaggregated RAN architecture) that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The network architecture 200 may illustrate an example for implementing one or more aspects of the wireless communications system 100. The network architecture 200 may include one or more CUs 160-a that may communicate directly with a core network 130-a via a backhaul communication link 120-a, or indirectly with the core network 130-a through one or more disaggregated network entities 105 (e.g., a Near-RT RIC 175-b via an E2 link, or a Non-RT RIC 175-aassociated with an SMO 180-a (e.g., an SMO Framework) , or both) . A CU 160-a may communicate with one or more DUs 165-a via respective midhaul communication links 162-a (e.g., an F1 interface) . The DUs 165-a may communicate with one or more RUs 170-a via respective fronthaul communication links 168-a. The RUs 170-a may be associated with respective coverage areas 110-a and may communicate with UEs 115-avia one or more communication links 125-a. In some implementations, a UE 115-a may be simultaneously served by multiple RUs 170-a.
Each of the network entities 105 of the network architecture 200 (e.g., CUs 160-a, DUs 165-a, RUs 170-a, Non-RT RICs 175-a, Near-RT RICs 175-b, SMOs 180-a, Open Clouds (O-Clouds) 205, Open eNBs (O-eNBs) 210) may include one or more interfaces or may be coupled with one or more interfaces configured to receive or transmit signals (e.g., data, information) via a wired or wireless transmission medium.
Each network entity 105, or an associated processor (e.g., controller) providing instructions to an interface of the network entity 105, may be configured to communicate with one or more of the other network entities 105 via the transmission medium. For example, the network entities 105 may include a wired interface configured to receive or transmit signals over a wired transmission medium to one or more of the other network entities 105. Additionally, or alternatively, the network entities 105 may include a wireless interface, which may include a receiver, a transmitter, or transceiver (e.g., an RF transceiver) configured to receive or transmit signals, or both, over a wireless transmission medium to one or more of the other network entities 105.
In some examples, a CU 160-a may host one or more higher layer control functions. Such control functions may include RRC, PDCP, SDAP, or the like. Each control function may be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other control functions hosted by the CU 160-a. A CU 160-a may be configured to handle user plane functionality (e.g., CU-UP) , control plane functionality (e.g., CU-CP) , or a combination thereof. In some examples, a CU 160-a may be logically split into one or more CU-UP units and one or more CU-CP units. A CU-UP unit may communicate bidirectionally with the CU-CP unit via an interface, such as an E1 interface when implemented in an O-RAN configuration. A CU 160-a may be implemented to communicate with a DU 165-a, as necessary, for network control and signaling.
A DU 165-a may correspond to a logical unit that includes one or more functions (e.g., base station functions, RAN functions) to control the operation of one or more RUs 170-a. In some examples, a DU 165-a may host, at least partially, one or more of an RLC layer, a MAC layer, and one or more aspects of a PHY layer (e.g., a high PHY layer, such as modules for FEC encoding and decoding, scrambling, modulation and demodulation, or the like) depending, at least in part, on a functional split, such as those defined by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) . In some examples, a DU 165-a may further host one or more low PHY layers. Each layer may be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other layers hosted by the DU 165-a, or with control functions hosted by a CU 160-a.
In some examples, lower-layer functionality may be implemented by one or more RUs 170-a. For example, an RU 170-a, controlled by a DU 165-a, may correspond to a logical node that hosts RF processing functions, or low-PHY layer functions (e.g., performing fast Fourier transform (FFT) , inverse FFT (iFFT) , digital beamforming, physical random access channel (PRACH) extraction and filtering, or the like) , or both, based at least in part on the functional split, such as a lower-layer functional split. In such an architecture, an RU 170-a may be implemented to handle over the air (OTA) communication with one or more UEs 115-a. In some implementations, real-time and non-real-time aspects of control and user plane communication with the RU (s) 170-amay be controlled by the corresponding DU 165-a. In some examples, such a configuration may enable a DU 165-a and a CU 160-a to be implemented in a cloud-based RAN architecture, such as a vRAN architecture.
The SMO 180-a may be configured to support RAN deployment and provisioning of non-virtualized and virtualized network entities 105. For non-virtualized network entities 105, the SMO 180-a may be configured to support the deployment of dedicated physical resources for RAN coverage requirements which may be managed via an operations and maintenance interface (e.g., an O1 interface) . For virtualized network entities 105, the SMO 180-a may be configured to interact with a cloud computing platform (e.g., an O-Cloud 205) to perform network entity life cycle management (e.g., to instantiate virtualized network entities 105) via a cloud computing platform interface (e.g., an O2 interface) . Such virtualized network entities 105 can include, but are not limited to, CUs 160-a, DUs 165-a, RUs 170-a, and Near-RT RICs 175-b. In some implementations, the SMO 180-a may communicate with components configured in accordance with a 4G RAN (e.g., via an O1 interface) . Additionally, or alternatively, in some implementations, the SMO 180-a may communicate directly with one or more RUs 170-a via an O1 interface. The SMO 180-a also may include a Non-RT RIC 175-a configured to support functionality of the SMO 180-a.
The Non-RT RIC 175-a may be configured to include a logical function that enables non-real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources, Artificial Intelligence (AI) or Machine Learning (ML) workflows including model training and updates, or policy-based guidance of applications/features in the Near-RT RIC 175-b. The Non-RT RIC 175-a may be coupled to or communicate with (e.g., via
an A1 interface) the Near-RT RIC 175-b. The Near-RT RIC 175-b may be configured to include a logical function that enables near-real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources via data collection and actions over an interface (e.g., via an E2 interface) connecting one or more CUs 160-a, one or more DUs 165-a, or both, as well as an O-eNB 210, with the Near-RT RIC 175-b.
In some examples, to generate AI/ML models to be deployed in the Near-RT RIC 175-b, the Non-RT RIC 175-a may receive parameters or external enrichment information from external servers. Such information may be utilized by the Near-RT RIC 175-b and may be received at the SMO 180-a or the Non-RT RIC 175-a from non-network data sources or from network functions. In some examples, the Non-RT RIC 175-a or the Near-RT RIC 175-b may be configured to tune RAN behavior or performance. For example, the Non-RT RIC 175-a may monitor long-term trends and patterns for performance and employ AI or ML models to perform corrective actions through the SMO 180-a (e.g., reconfiguration via O1) or via generation of RAN management policies (e.g., A1 policies) .
In some examples, an RU 170-a may transmit, to a UE 115-a, a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value. The first burst may include a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. A same or different RU 170-a may transmit, to a UE 115-a, a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value. The second burst may include a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The UE 115-a may transmit, to the RU 170-a, DU 165-a, or CU 160-a, an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals. The RU 170-a, DU 165-a, or CU 160-a may utilize the indication of the frequency offset to update a precoder for transmitting one or more signals to the UE 115-a. Communication of bursts of reference signals or communication of a frequency offset may be performed as described with reference to FIG. 1 or any of FIGs. 3–19.
FIG. 3 shows an example of a wireless communications system 300 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one
or more aspects of the present disclosure. The wireless communications system 300 may implement aspects of or may be implemented by aspects of the wireless communications system 100 or the network architecture 200. For example, the wireless communications system 300 includes a UE 115-b, which may be an example of a UE 115 described with respect to FIG. 1 or the UE 115-a described with respect to FIG. 2. The wireless communications system 300 also includes a network entity 105-a, which may be an example of a network entity 105 as described with respect to FIG. 1.
The UE 115-b may communicate with the network entity 105-a using a communication link 125-b, which may be an example of a communication link 125 described with respect to FIG. 1 or an example of the communication link 125-a described with respect to FIG. 2. The communication link 125-b may include a bi-directional link that enables both uplink and downlink network communications. For example, the UE 115-b may transmit one or more uplink transmissions 305, such as uplink control signals or uplink data signals, to the network entity 105-a using the communication link 125-b, and the network entity 105-a may transmit one or more downlink transmissions 310, such as downlink control signals or downlink data signals, to the UE 115-b using the communication link 125-b.
While one network entity 105-a is shown in FIG. 3, one or more network entities 105-a may be utilized in accordance with some of the techniques described herein. For example, one network entity 105-a may include multiple TRPs (e.g., a first TRP and a second TRP) . Additionally, or alternatively, multiple network entities 105-a may be utilized, where each network entity 105-a includes one or more TRPs (e.g., a first network entity 105-a may include a first TRP and a second network entity 105-a may include a second TRP) .
The network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, a first burst 345 of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value. A burst of reference signals may be a set of reference signals. For instance, a burst of reference signals may include a series (e.g., two or more) reference signals over time. In some approaches, the reference signals may be CSI-RSs, TRSs, or another kind of reference signal. The first burst 345 may include a first reference signal 320 during a first occasion 350 and a second reference signal 325 during a second occasion 355 after a first interval from the first occasion 350.
In some examples, a QCL value may indicate a relationship between antenna ports. In some approaches, a first QCL value may indicate that an antenna port utilized to transmit a signal shares a delay spread, average delay, Doppler spread, or Doppler shift with another antenna port. A second QCL value may indicate that an antenna port utilized to transmit a signal shares a Doppler spread or Doppler shift with another antenna port. A third QCL value may indicate that an antenna port utilized to transmit a signal shares a Doppler shift or average delay with another antenna port. A fourth QCL value may indicate that an antenna port utilized to transmit a signal shares a spatial receive parameter with another antenna port. One or more other QCL values may be utilized in other examples.
The network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive a second burst 340 of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from (e.g., independent of, or other than) the first QCL value. The second burst 340 may include a third reference signal 330 during the first occasion 350 and a fourth reference signal 335 during the second occasion 355 after a second interval from the first occasion 350.
In some approaches, reference signaling for a frequency offset measurement may include N > 1 reference signal bursts (e.g., the first burst 345 and the second burst 340) , where each reference signal (e.g., the first reference signal 320, the second reference signal 325, the third reference signal 330, or the fourth reference signal 335) is associated with a QCL value (e.g., each burst may correspond to each TRP, and thus N QCL values) .
In some examples, a time interval may be greater than a threshold (e.g., greater than two slots, five slots, 10 slots, 12 slots, 13 slots, 15, slots, or 20 slots, among other examples) . Within each burst, for instance, a time interval between at least two of L CSI-RS occasions (e.g., L = 2 or 4) may be utilized for inter-burst (e.g., inter-TRP) frequency offset measurement. The time interval may be larger than a threshold (e.g., 10 or 20 slots, or larger than the 4 symbols in 2 slots of a TRS) . In some approaches, a time interval may be measured from the beginning of one reference signal (e.g., the first reference signal 320) to the beginning of another reference signal (e.g., the second reference signal 325) . A time interval may be expressed in slots, seconds, or another unit.
In some examples, the first interval may be equal to the second interval. For instance, the first interval may have a same duration as the second interval. The first interval and the second interval may partially or completely overlap in time. In some examples, the first interval may be different from the second interval. For instance, the duration of the first interval may have a different length in time than the duration of the second interval.
In some examples, the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal 320 and the second reference signal 325. The second reference signal 325 may be output or received after the first interval from the first reference signal 320. The network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal 330 and the fourth reference signal 335. The fourth reference signal 335 may be output or received after the second interval from the third reference signal 330. In a first reference signaling arrangement, for instance, N sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes L CSI-RSs with the same QCL value (e.g., each set corresponds to each burst and each TRP) . In some examples, the first reference signaling arrangement may be according to a Type-II Doppler channel measurement resource extended for the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RSs within a set. An example of the first reference signaling arrangement is provided with reference to a first example 405-a in FIG. 4.
In some examples, the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, the first reference signal 320 and the third reference signal 330 during the first occasion 350 via a first set of CSI-RS resources. The network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, the second reference signal 325 and the fourth reference signal 335 during the second occasion 355 via a second set of CSI-RS resources. In a second reference signaling arrangement, for instance, L sets of single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized, where each set includes N single-port CSI-RSs with N QCL values (e.g., each set may correspond to all TRPs at an occasion group) . In some examples, the second reference signaling arrangement may be according to a TDCP channel measurement resource extended for the multi-TRP case, where the time interval may be utilized between CSI-RS sets. An example of the second
reference signaling arrangement is provided with reference to a second example 405-b in FIG. 4.
In a third reference signaling arrangement, for instance, one set of N single-port CSI-RSs may be utilized (e.g., each CSI-RS may correspond to each burst and each TRP, thus each having one QCL value) , where each CSI-RS is parameterized with L offsets and occurs as L CSI-RS occasions. For instance, each CSI-RS may occur L times for aperiodic CSI-RS or may occur L times per period for periodic CSI-RS. An example of the third reference signaling arrangement is provided with reference to a third example 405-c in FIG. 4.
In some examples, the first occasion 350 may be within a first threshold duration or the second occasion 355 may be within a second threshold duration. For instance, different reference signal bursts within a same occasion group may satisfy a condition (e.g., threshold duration) for phase coherence or continuity between reference signals. In some approaches, a group of reference signals in an occasion (e.g., in the first occasion 350 or the second occasion 355) may occur within a threshold duration (e.g., within a same slot or within two consecutive slots) . Additionally, or alternatively, switching between downlink and uplink may not occur (e.g., may not be permitted or schedule) within the threshold duration. In some examples, the network entity 105-amay frequency-division multiplex reference signals within an occasion. For instance, the first reference signal 320 and the third reference signal 330 in the first occasion 350 may be frequency-division multiplexed.
In some examples, a phase coherence or continuity condition (e.g., threshold) may not be utilized between different occasion groups. For example, assuming a receiving phase uncertainty φUE is introduced across two occasion groups, and is measured as ΔφTRP#1=φTRP#1 (t1) -φTRP#1 (t0) +φUE and ΔφTRP#2=φTRP#2 (t1) -φTRP#2 (t0) +φUE for a first TRP (e.g., TRP1) and a second TRP (e.g., TRP2) respectively, the receiving phase uncertainty may be canceled out with inter-TRP operation as provided in accordance with φTRP#2to1=ΔφTRP#2-ΔφTRP#1= (φTRP#2 (t1) -φTRP#2 (t0) ) - (φTRP#1 (t1) -φTRP#1 (t0) ) , where φTRP#1 is a phase for a first TRP, t0 is a first time, t1 is a second time, and φTRP#2 is a phase for a second TRP.
In some approaches, the network entity 105-a may employ one or more time interval patterns for L occasions within a burst. In a first approach for L/2 CSI-RS occasion pairs, for example, each pair may satisfy a time interval (e.g., may conform to the first interval or the second interval) . For instance, the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, additional reference signals of the first burst 345 during additional occasions (not shown in FIG. 3) that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval. In some cases, at least one of the additional reference signals of the first burst 345 may be output or received between the first reference signal 320 and the second reference signal 325. The network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, additional reference signals of the second burst 340 during additional occasions (not shown in FIG. 3) that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval. In some cases, at least one of the additional reference signals of the second burst 340 may be received between the third reference signal 330 and the fourth reference signal 335. An example of the first approach is given with reference to FIG. 5.
In a second approach for L-1 CSI-RS occasion pairs that include two consecutive occasions, each pair may satisfy a time interval (e.g., may conform to the first interval or the second interval) . For instance, the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, additional reference signals of the first burst 345 during additional occasions (not shown in FIG. 3) that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval. The additional reference signals of the first burst 345 may be output or received before the first reference signal 320 or after the second reference signal 325. The network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, additional reference signals of the second burst 340 during additional occasions (not shown in FIG. 3) that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval. The additional reference signals of the second burst 340 may be output or received before the third reference signal 330 or after the fourth reference signal 335. An example of the second approach is given with reference to FIG. 5.
The first approach may utilize a relatively shorter time overall for measurement, but may utilize a larger buffer size at the UE 115-b than some other approaches (e.g., the second approach) . The second approach may have provide a
relatively higher signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) due to L-1 time interval pairs, while the first approach has L/2.
Some of the techniques described herein may be utilized to be compatible with approaches for tracking reference signaling. In some examples, the network entity 105-a may configure one of the reference signal occasions of a TRP to be the same as one of the CSI-RSs within a TRS set, for one or more TRPs. In some examples, at least one of the N bursts (e.g., N TRPs) may be linked to a TRS set with a same QCL value as the burst, and one of the CSI-RSs within the TRS set may satisfy the time interval (e.g., may conform to the first interval or the second interval) . For instance, the TRS set may satisfy the time interval with respect to at least one of the L-1 CSI-RSs or occasions for the third reference signaling arrangement. Some of the approaches may extend a TDCP channel measurement resource (CMR) configuration. In some examples, the first reference signal 320 may be associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling. Additionally, or alternatively, a resource set for tracking reference signaling may be associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one TRS may be output or received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal 320 or the first occasion 350.
Some examples of the techniques described herein may include periodic or aperiodic reference signaling (e.g., CSI-RSs) . In aperiodic reference signaling (e.g., aperiodic CSI-RS) , the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) a trigger for the UE 115-b to receive one or more bursts of reference signals. For aperiodic CSI-RS, for instance, within a burst (e.g., a TRP) , a difference in time (e.g., a delta between the triggering offsets) of at least two of the CSI-RS occasions (e.g., offset or delta of offsets) may be equal to a time interval (e.g., the first interval or the second interval) . Aperiodic reference signaling may be utilized in accordance with the first reference signaling arrangement, the second reference signaling arrangement, or the third reference signaling arrangement (e.g., for the bursts or occasion groups of the first, second, or third reference signaling arrangements) .
In some examples, the network entity 105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, based on an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal 320 and the second reference signal 325. The second reference signal 325 may be output or received after the first interval from the first reference signal 320. The network entity
105-a may output (e.g., transmit) , or the UE 115-b may receive, based on the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal 330 and the fourth reference signal 335. The fourth reference signal 335 may be output or received after the second interval from the third reference signal 330. An example of aperiodic reference signaling is given with reference to FIG. 6.
In periodic reference signaling (e.g., periodic CSI-RS) , the network entity 105-a may configure the UE 115-b (e.g., may send a signal to configure the UE 115-b) to receive one or more bursts of reference signals periodically. For periodic CSI-RS, for instance, within a burst (e.g., a TRP) , a difference in time (e.g., a delta between the offsets within a periodicity) of at least two of the CSI-RS occasions (e.g., offset or delta of offsets) may be equal to a time interval (e.g., the first interval or the second interval) . Periodic reference signaling may be utilized in accordance with the first reference signaling arrangement, the second reference signaling arrangement, or the third reference signaling arrangement (e.g., for the bursts or occasion groups of the first, second, or third reference signaling arrangements) .
In some examples, the network entity 105-a may output, or the UE 115-b may receive, a signal indicating a period (e.g., periodicity) for outputting or receiving the first burst 345 and the second burst 340. For periodic reference signaling, for instance, the signal may indicate a beginning (e.g., beginning slot) of a period, a length of the period, or a combination thereof. The first interval or the second interval may be based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period. An example of periodic reference signaling is given with reference to FIG. 6.
The UE 115-b may utilize the reference signals (e.g., the first reference signal 320, the second reference signal 325, the third reference signal 330, or the fourth reference signal 335) to determine (e.g., calculate) a phase offset (e.g., an inter-TRP phase offset) or a frequency offset (e.g., an inter-TRP frequency offset) . The UE 115-b may transmit, or the network entity 105-a may receive, an indication 315 of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst 345 of reference signals and the second burst 340 of reference signals. In some approaches, the network entity 105-a may utilize the indication 315 of the frequency offset to update a precoder (e.g., to update a previously transmitted or obtained PMI) .
Some approaches to determining an inter-TRP phase offset are given as follows. In some examples, the inter-TRP phase offset may be reported (e.g., sent to the network entity 105-a from the UE 115-b) for PDSCH precoding (relative to a previous PMI, for instance) . In some approaches, the UE 115-b may measure N CSI-RSs at time t0 (transmitted by N TRPs, for example) and may report the PMI for CJT. Based on the reported PMI, where the precoder may be denoted asthe network entity 105-a may derive an inter-TRP phase offset (s) (by averaging across all ports of a pair of TRPs, for instance) . For example, a first TRP (e.g., TRP#1) may be utilized as a reference TRP, and the TRP#n-to-#1 phase at time t0 may be denoted as φn (t0) =φTRP#n (t0) -φTRP#1 (t0) , where φ1 (t0) =0. Because the phase may be utilized for PMI, the CMR may be a multi-port CSI-RS. For instance, N multi-port CSI-RSs may be utilized (from N TRPs, respectively) .
At time t1, the UE 115-b may measure and report one or more inter-TRP phase offsets. For example, the UE 115-b may measure phase offsets in accordance with: φn (t1) =φTRP#n (t1) -φTRP#1 (t1) , n=2, ..., N. For a reference TRP (e.g., TRP#1) , φ1 (t1) =0 may not be reported, resulting in N-1 inter-TRP phase (s) in total. To reduce reference signaling overhead, N single-port CSI-RSs (from N TRPs respectively) may be utilized in some approaches.
The network entity 105-a may apply a precoder for a CJT PDSCH at time t >t1 based on the phase offset (s) or the frequency offset (s) . In some examples, the network entity 105-a may apply the precoder based on phase offset updates in accordance with: The channel for each TRP may be denoted as HTRP. The channel [HTRP#1 (t1) , ..., HTRP#n (t1) , ...] ≈ [HTRP#1 (t0) exp (j (φTRP#1 (t1) -φTRP#1 (t0) ) ) , ..., HTRP#n (t0) exp (j (φTRP#n (t1) -φTRP#n (t0) ) ) , ... ] =
exp (j (φTRP#1 (t1) -φTRP#1 (t0) ) ) [HTRP#1 (t0) , ..., HTRP#n (t0) exp (j (φn (t1) -φn (t0) ) ) , ... ] .
In some approaches, the PMI may be updated less frequently than the phase report (e.g., PMI may be updated every 40 ms versus 5 or 10 ms for the phase offset) . In some approaches, the precoder may be assumed as constant until the next phase offset update (e.g., t1 to t2) or PMI update. In some cases, one or more CJT PDSCH transmissions may occur between phase updates.
Some approaches to determining an inter-TRP phase offset are given as follows. In some examples, the inter-TRP frequency offset may be reported (e.g., sent to the network entity 105-a from the UE 115-b) for PDSCH precoding (relative to a previous PMI or inter-TRP phase offset, for instance) . In some approaches, the UE 115-b may measure N CSI-RSs at time t0 (transmitted by N TRPs, for example) and may report the PMI for CJT as described herein. Based on the reported PMI, where the precoder may be denoted asthe network entity 105-amay derive an inter-TRP phase offset (s) (by averaging across all ports of a pair of TRPs, for instance) . For example, a first TRP (e.g., TRP#1) may be utilized as a reference TRP, and the TRP#n-to-#1 phase at time t0 may be denoted as φn (t0) =φTRP#n (t0) -φTRP#1 (t0) , where φ1 (t0) =0. Because the phase may be utilized for PMI, the CMR may be a multi-port CSI-RS. For instance, N multi-port CSI-RSs may be utilized (from N TRPs, respectively) .
At time t1, the UE 115-b may measure or report one or more inter-TRP phase offsets: φn (t1) =φTRP#n (t1) -φTRP#1 (t1) , n=2, ..., N, or one or more inter-TRP frequency offsets: fn (t1) =fTRP#n (t1) -fTRP#1 (t1) , n=2, ..., N, where fTRP denotes a frequency corresponding to a TRP and f denotes an inter-TRP frequency offset. For a reference TRP (e.g., TRP#1) , φ1 (t1) =0 and fn (t1) =0, the phase or frequency offset may not be reported. Accordingly, N-1 inter-TRP phase offset (s) or frequency offset (s) in total may be reported. To reduce reference signaling overhead, N single-port CSI-RSs (from N TRPs respectively) may be utilized in some approaches.
In some approaches, the reference signaling may be different for phase measurement and frequency measurement. Phase measurement may utilize one-shot reference signaling in some examples. Frequency measurement may utilize a series of reference signal occasions over time (e.g., N TRSs from the N TRPs) .
The network entity 105-a may apply a precoder for CJT PDSCH at time t >t1 in accordance with: based on a phase offset or frequency offset update. The channel [HTRP#1 (t) , ..., HTRP#n (t) , ... ] ≈ [HTRP#1 (t1) exp (j2πfTRP#1 (t1) (t-t1) ) , ..., HTRP#1 (t1) exp (j2πfTRP#n (t1) (t-t1) ) , ... ] =exp (j2πfTRP#1 (t1) (t-t1) ) [HTRP#1 (t1) , ..., HTRP#n (t1) exp (j2πfn (t1) (t-t1) ) , ... ] .
In some approaches with frequency offset updates, phase offset updates may be utilized less frequently. For a frequency offset update, reference signaling overhead may be reduced. Because frequency measurement may utilize a time series of L reference signal occasions (e.g., L=2 or 4) , the update periodicity may be longer than L times the phase offset update periodicity (e.g., 5 ms) , which may result in a periodicity longer than 2×5 = 10 ms for L=2. In some approaches, a longer periodicity than a PMI update periodicity (e.g., 40 msec) may be utilized (e.g., 160 ms) . In some approaches, the network entity 105-a may utilize a precoder with a linear phase rotation over time until a phase offset update, a frequency offset update (e.g., t1 to t2) , or a PMI update. In some cases, one or more CJT PDSCH transmissions may occur between phase or frequency updates.
In some examples, for a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) with multiple antennas or receivers, the frequency offset may be greater than or equal to a minimum frequency offset value associated with antennas of the UE 115-b or may be less than or equal to a maximum frequency offset value associated with the antennas of the UE 115-b. For instance, the measured inter-TRP frequency offset may not be smaller than the minimum frequency offset measured by all antennas or receivers of the UE 115-b, and may not be larger than the maximum frequency offset measured by all antennas or
receivers of the UE 115-b. In some approaches, the inter-TRP frequency offset may be an average frequency offset obtained by averaging across the multiple antennas or receivers.
In some aspects, the UE 115-b may transmit, or the network entity 105-amay obtain, information indicating a capability of the UE 115-b related to reference signaling or frequency offset accuracy. For example, the UE 115-b may transmit, or the network entity 105-a may obtain, information indicating a capability of the UE 115-b associated with a duration between the first occasion 350 and the second occasion 355. In some examples, for a length of a time-interval (e.g., the first interval or the second interval) , the UE 115-b may report a capability regarding a minimum length of a time interval (because the UE-measured inter-TRP frequency offset accuracy may be determined based on the length) . A relatively shorter time interval may demand a higher phase accuracy, and thus a higher demand on receiver sensitivity. In some examples, the UE 115-b may transmit information indicating a maximum length (because the UE 115-b may buffer all received raw data over the time interval, for example) .
Additionally, or alternatively, the UE 115-b may transmit information indicating a capability of the UE 115-b associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset. For instance, the information may indicate an inter-TRP frequency offset accuracy. The inter-TRP frequency offset accuracy may be dependent on the length of time-interval. In some aspects, the information may indicate a capability related to an inter-TRP phase offset accuracy.
Some examples of the techniques described herein may enable MIMO on UE-assisted CJT for multi-TRP (mTRP) scenarios. For example, some of the reporting enhancements described may be utilized for CJT deployments. Some approaches may be performed with non-ideal synchronization or backhaul for frequency-division duplexing (FDD) or time-division duplexing (TDD) . Some aspects may be performed in one or more frequency ranges, such as frequency range 1 (FR1) . Some examples of the techniques may provide inter-TRP time misalignment and frequency or phase offset measurement and reporting with CSI-RS structures. Some approaches may be performed for periodic rea porting or stand-alone aperiodic reporting on PUSCH.
FIG. 4 shows examples of timing diagrams 400 that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. FIG. 4 illustrates a first example 405-a of reference signaling, a second example 405-b of reference signaling, and a third example 405-c of reference signaling. The first example 405-a, the second example 405-b, and the third example 405-c each include N = 2 bursts (e.g., two bursts associated with two TRPs) and L = 2 occasions.
The first example 405-a is an example of a first reference signaling arrangement. A network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a first burst 345-a of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value. The first burst 345-a may include a first reference signal 420-a during a first occasion 410-a and a second reference signal 425-a during a second occasion 415-a after a first interval 440-a from the first occasion 410-a. The network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or the UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a second burst 340-a of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value. The second burst 340-a may include a third reference signal 430-a during the first occasion 410-a and a fourth reference signal 435-a during the second occasion 415-a after a second interval 445-a from the first occasion 410-a.
In the first reference signaling arrangement, each burst may be communicated via a respective set of reference signal resources (e.g., CSI-RS resources) . The first reference signaling arrangement may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3. For example, the first reference signal 420-a and the second reference signal 425-a may be communicated (e.g., outputted or received) , via a first set of CSI-RS resources. The second reference signal 425-a may be communicated after the first interval 440-a from the first reference signal 420-a. The third reference signal 430-aand the fourth reference signal 435-a may be communicated via a second set of CSI-RS resources. The fourth reference signal 435-a may be communicated after the second interval 445-a from the third reference signal 430-a. In some examples, the first interval 440-a may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots. The second interval 445-a may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots.
The second example 405-b is an example of a second reference signaling arrangement. A network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a first burst 345-b of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value. The first burst 345-b may include a first reference signal 420-b during a first occasion 410-b and a second reference signal 425-b during a second occasion 415-b after a first interval 440-b from the first occasion 410-b. The network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or the UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a second burst 340-b of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value. The second burst 340-b may include a third reference signal 430-b during the first occasion 410-b and a fourth reference signal 435-b during the second occasion 415-b after a second interval 445-b from the first occasion 410-b.
In the second reference signaling arrangement, each occasion may be communicated via a respective set of reference signal resources (e.g., CSI-RS resources) . The second reference signaling arrangement may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3. For example, the first reference signal 420-b and the third reference signal 430-b may be communicated (e.g., outputted or received) , via a first set of CSI-RS resources. The second reference signal 425-b may be communicated after the first interval 440-b from the first reference signal 420-b. The second reference signal 425-b and the fourth reference signal 435-b may be communicated via a second set of CSI-RS resources. The fourth reference signal 435-b may be communicated after the second interval 445-b from the third reference signal 430-b. In some examples, the first interval 440-b may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots. The second interval 445-b may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots.
The third example 405-c is an example of a third reference signaling arrangement. A network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive a first burst 345-c of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value. The first burst 345-c may include a first reference signal 420-c during a first occasion 410-c and a second reference signal 425-c during a second occasion 415-c after a first interval 440-c from the first occasion 410-c. The network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or the UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a second burst 340-c of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second
QCL value separate from the first QCL value. The second burst 340-c may include a third reference signal 430-c during the first occasion 410-c and a fourth reference signal 435-c during the second occasion 415-c after a second interval 445-c from the first occasion 410-c.
In the third reference signaling arrangement, one set of reference signal resources may be utilized. The third reference signaling arrangement may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3. For example, one set of single-port CSI-RS resources may be utilized, where each CSI-RS resource corresponds to each burst (e.g., the first burst 345-c and the second burst 340-c) and each TRP. Each CSI-RS resource may correspond to a QCL value. As illustrated in FIG. 4, the first burst 345-c may be communicated via CSI-RS1 and the second burst 340-c may be communicated via CSI-RS2. The second reference signal 425-c may be communicated after the first interval 440-c from the first reference signal 420-c. The fourth reference signal 435-c may be communicated after the second interval 445-c from the third reference signal 430-c. In some examples, the first interval 440-c may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots. The second interval 445-c may be 10 slots or another quantity of slots.
FIG. 5 shows examples of timing diagrams 500 that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. FIG. 5 illustrates a first example 505-a of reference signaling and a second example 505-b of reference signaling.
The first example 505-a is an example of a first approach for a time interval pattern for L = 4 occasions within a burst. The first approach may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3. A network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a first burst 345-d of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value. The first burst 345-d may include a first reference signal 520-a during a first occasion 510-a and a second reference signal 525-a during a second occasion 515-a after a first interval 540-a from the first occasion 510-a. The first burst 345-d may also include a first additional reference signal 580-aduring a third occasion 550-a and a second additional reference signal 590-a during a fourth occasion 555-a after a third interval 560-a from the third occasion 550-a. The network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or the UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a second burst 340-d of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a
second QCL value separate from the first QCL value. The second burst 340-d may include a third reference signal 530-a during the first occasion 510-a and a fourth reference signal 535-a during the second occasion 515-a after a second interval 545-afrom the first occasion 510-a. The second burst 340-d may also include a third additional reference signal 585-a during the third occasion 550-a and a fourth additional reference signal 595-a during the fourth occasion 555-a after a fourth interval 565-afrom the third occasion 550-a.
In the first example 505-a, L = 4 occasions. With L/2 = 2 CSI-RS occasion pairs, each pair satisfies a time interval. For instance, the third interval 560-a (between the pair of the first additional reference signal 580-a and the second additional reference signal 590-a) is equal to the first interval 540-a (between the pair of the first reference signal 520-a and the second reference signal 525-a) . Additionally, the fourth interval 565-a (between the pair of the third additional reference signal 585-a and the fourth additional reference signal 595-a) is equal to the second interval 545-a (between the pair of the first occasion 510-a and the second occasion 515-a) . In some examples, the first interval 540-a, the second interval 545-a, the third interval 560-a, or the fourth interval 565-a may be 10 slots, 13 slots, 15 slots, 20 slots, or another quantity of slots or another amount of time. The first approach may utilize a relatively shorter time overall for measurement, but may utilize a larger buffer size at a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) than some other approaches.
The second example 505-b is an example of a second approach for a time interval pattern for L = 4 occasions within a burst. The second approach may be structured as described with reference to FIG. 3. A network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a first burst 345-e of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value. The first burst 345-e may include a first reference signal 520-b during a first occasion 510-b and a second reference signal 525-b during a second occasion 515-b after a first interval 540-b from the first occasion 510-b. The first burst 345-e may also include a first additional reference signal 580-b during a third occasion 550-b after a first additional interval 570-b from the second occasion 515-b, and may include and a second additional reference signal 590-b during a fourth occasion 555-b after a third interval 560-b from the third occasion 550-b. The network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or
the UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a second burst 340-e of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value. The second burst 340-e may include a third reference signal 530-b during the first occasion 510-b and a fourth reference signal 535-b during the second occasion 515-b after a second interval 545-b from the first occasion 510-b. The second burst 340-e may also include a third additional reference signal 585-b during the third occasion 550-b after a second additional interval 575-b and a fourth additional reference signal 595-b during the fourth occasion 555-b after a fourth interval 565-b from the third occasion 550-b.
In the second example 505-b, L = 4 occasions. With L-1 = 3 CSI-RS occasion pairs, each pair satisfies a time interval. For instance, the first additional interval 570-b (between the pair of the second reference signal 525-b and the first additional reference signal 580-b) and the third interval 560-b (between the pair of the first additional reference signal 580-b and the second additional reference signal 590-b) are equal to the first interval 540-b (between the pair of the first reference signal 520-b and the second reference signal 525-b) . The second additional interval 575-b (between the pair of the fourth reference signal 535-b and the third additional reference signal 585-b) and the fourth interval 565-b (between the pair of the third additional reference signal 585-b and the fourth additional reference signal 595-b) are equal to the second interval 545-b (between the pair of the third reference signal 530-a and the fourth reference signal 535-a) . In some examples, the first interval 540-b, the second interval 545-b, the third interval 560-b, or the fourth interval 565-b may be 10 slots, 13 slots, 15 slots, 20 slots, or another quantity of slots or another amount of time. The second approach may have provide a relatively higher SNR due to L-1 time interval pairs, while the first approach has L/2.
FIG. 6 shows examples of timing diagrams 600 that support reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. FIG. 6 illustrates a first example 505-a of reference signaling and a second example 505-b of reference signaling.
The first example 605-a is an example of aperiodic reference signaling in accordance with some of the techniques described herein. Aperiodic reference signaling may be performed as described with reference to FIG. 3. A network entity (e.g.,
network entity 105-a) may output, or a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, a trigger 620 for a first burst 670-a of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value or for a second burst 675-a of reference signaling associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value. A first occasion 610-a of reference signals may occur after a first trigger offset 625 (e.g., a first quantity of slots or amount of time) from the trigger 620, and a second occasion 615-a may occur after a second trigger offset 630 (e.g., a second quantity of slots or amount of time) from the trigger 620. A difference in time (e.g., a delta between the triggering offsets) of the first occasion 610-a and the second occasion 615-a (e.g., offset or delta of offsets) may be equal to a time interval 640.
The second example 605-b is an example of periodic reference signaling in accordance with some of the techniques described herein. Periodic reference signaling may be performed as described with reference to FIG. 3. A network entity (e.g., network entity 105-a) may output, or a UE (e.g., UE 115-b) may receive, configuration signaling to configure the periodic reference signaling. In some examples, configuration signaling may indicate a first offset, a second offset, an interval, or a period (e.g., periodicity) . In the second example 605-b, a first burst 670-b of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value and a second burst 675-b of reference signaling associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value. In a first period 655-a, a first occasion 610-b of reference signals may occur after a first offset 645-a (e.g., a first quantity of slots or amount of time) from the beginning of a first period 655-a, and a second occasion 615-b may occur after a second offset 650-a (e.g., a second quantity of slots or amount of time) from the beginning of the first period 655-a. A difference in time (e.g., a delta between the offsets) of the first occasion 610-b and the second occasion 615-b (e.g., offset or delta of offsets) may be equal to a time interval 660-a.
Periodic reference signaling may recur periodically. For instance, a second period 655-b may occur after the first period 655-a. In the second period 655-b, a third occasion 618-b of reference signals may occur after a first offset 645-b (e.g., a first quantity of slots or amount of time) from the beginning of the second period 655-b, and a fourth occasion 622-b may occur after a second offset 650-b (e.g., a second quantity of slots or amount of time) from the beginning of the second period 655-b. A difference in time (e.g., a delta between the offsets) of the third occasion 618-b and the fourth occasion 622-b (e.g., offset or delta of offsets) may be equal to a time interval 660-b.
In some approaches, aperiodic reference signaling or periodic reference signaling may be utilized in accordance with the first reference signaling arrangement, the second reference signaling arrangement, or the third reference signaling arrangement as indicated in Table (1) :
Table (1)
FIG. 7 shows an example of a process flow 700 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. A wireless communications system may include a UE 115-c and a network entity 105-b. The UE 115-c may be an example of the UEs 115, the UE 115-a, or the UE 115-b, and the network entity 105-b may be an example of the network entities 105 or the network entity 105-a, as described herein.
In the following description of the process flow 700, the operations between the network entity 105-b and the UE 115-c may be transmitted in a different order than the example order shown, or the operations performed by the network entity 105-b and the UE 115-c may be performed in different orders or at different times. Some operations may be omitted from the process flow 700, and other operations may be added to the process flow 700. Further, although some operations or signaling may be shown to occur at different times for discussion purposes, these operations may actually occur at the same time or in overlapping time periods in some examples.
At 705, the UE 115-c may transmit capability information to the network entity 105-b. The capability information may indicate a capability of the UE 115-c
associated with (e.g., indicating) a duration between reference signaling occasions. For example, the UE 115-c may transmit capability information as described with reference to FIG. 3.
In some examples, the network entity 105-b may output a configuration message to the UE 115-c. For example, the network entity 105-b may transmit a message indicating a configuration of the UE 115-c to calculate or provide an indication of an inter-TRP frequency offset. In some examples, the configuration message may be output in response to the capability information. In some examples, the configuration message may be communicated via an RRC message, a media access control (MAC) control element (CE) message, or another type of message.
At 710-a, during a first occasion, the network entity 105-b may output a first reference signal. For example, the network entity 105-b may transmit a first CSI-RS via a CSI-RS resource as described with reference to FIG. 3.
In some examples, the network entity 105-b may configure or schedule reference signal resources (e.g., CSI-RS resources) for bursts of reference signals corresponding to different TRPs. For example, the network entity 105-b may send one or more messages to configure or schedule one or more sets of reference signal resources for communicating (e.g., transmitting or receiving) multiple bursts of reference signals. In some approaches, a set of reference signal resources may be configured or scheduled corresponding to one burst and one TRP. For instance, a first set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled for a first burst (e.g., TRP) and a second set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled for a second burst (e.g., TRP) .
In some approaches, a set of reference signal resources may be configured or scheduled corresponding to one occasion and multiple TRPs. For instance, a first set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled for a first occasion (e.g., with reference signaling corresponding to multiple bursts or TRPs) and a second set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled for a second occasion (e.g., with reference signaling corresponding to multiple bursts or TRPs) .
In some approaches, a set of reference signal resources may be configured or scheduled, where each reference signal resource corresponding to one burst and one
TRP. For instance, a set of CSI-RS resources may be configured or scheduled, where a first CSI-RS resource corresponds to a first occasion of a first burst (e.g., first TRP) , a second CSI-RS resource corresponds to a second occasion of a first burst (e.g., first TRP) , a third CSI-RS resource corresponds to a first occasion of a second burst (e.g., second TRP) , and a fourth CSI-RS resource corresponds to a second occasion of a second burst (e.g., second TRP) .
At 715-a, during the first occasion, the network entity 105-b may output a third reference signal. For example, the network entity 105-b may transmit a third CSI-RS via a CSI-RS resource as described with reference to FIG. 3.
At 710-b, during a second occasion, the network entity 105-b may output a second reference signal. For example, the network entity 105-b may transmit a second CSI-RS via a CSI-RS resource as described with reference to FIG. 3. The first reference signal and the second reference signal may be included in a first burst.
At 715-b, during the second occasion, the network entity 105-b may output a fourth reference signal. For example, the network entity 105-b may transmit a fourth CSI-RS via a CSI-RS resource as described with reference to FIG. 3. The third reference signal and the fourth reference signal may be included in a second burst.
At 720, the UE 115-c may determine an inter-TRP frequency offset. For example, the UE 115-c may calculate an inter-TRP frequency offset as described with reference to FIG. 3.
At 725, the UE 115-c may transmit an indication of one or more frequency offsets. For example, the UE 115-c may transmit an indication of the inter-TRP frequency offset (s) as described with reference to FIG. 3. The inter-TRP frequency offset may differ from some channel feedback of other approaches. For example, some approaches may report phase or frequency information corresponding to a single TRP. The inter-TRP frequency offset may indicate an offset between multiple TRPs.
At 730, the network entity 105-b may output a signal 730. For example, the network entity 105-b may update a precoder based on the indication of the frequency offset, and may transmit a signal using the updated precoder.
FIG. 8 shows a block diagram 800 of a device 805 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 805 may be an example of aspects of a UE 115 as described herein. The device 805 may include a receiver 810, a transmitter 815, and a communications manager 820. The device 805, or one or more components of the device 805 (e.g., the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, the communications manager 820) , may include at least one processor, which may be coupled with at least one memory, to, individually or collectively, support or enable the described techniques. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The receiver 810 may provide a means for receiving information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 805. The receiver 810 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
The transmitter 815 may provide a means for transmitting signals generated by other components of the device 805. For example, the transmitter 815 may transmit information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) . In some examples, the transmitter 815 may be co-located with a receiver 810 in a transceiver module. The transmitter 815 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
The communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be examples of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein. For example, the communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be capable of performing one or more of the functions described herein.
In some examples, the communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in hardware (e.g., in communications management circuitry) . The hardware may include at least one of a processor, a digital signal processor (DSP) , a central processing unit (CPU) , an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) , a field-programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, a microcontroller, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure. In some examples, at least one processor and at least one memory coupled with the at least one processor may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein (e.g., by one or more processors, individually or collectively, executing instructions stored in the at least one memory) .
Additionally, or alternatively, the communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in code (e.g., as communications management software or firmware) executed by at least one processor (e.g., referred to as a processor-executable code) . If implemented in code executed by at least one processor, the functions of the communications manager 820, the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or various combinations or components thereof may be performed by a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA, a microcontroller, or any combination of these or other programmable logic devices (e.g., configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure) .
In some examples, the communications manager 820 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or both. For example, the communications manager 820 may receive information from the receiver 810, send information to the transmitter 815, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
For example, the communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated
with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
By including or configuring the communications manager 820 in accordance with examples as described herein, the device 805 (e.g., at least one processor controlling or otherwise coupled with the receiver 810, the transmitter 815, the communications manager 820, or a combination thereof) may support techniques for reduced processing, reduced power consumption, or more efficient utilization of communication resources.
FIG. 9 shows a block diagram 900 of a device 905 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 905 may be an example of aspects of a device 805 or a UE 115 as described herein. The device 905 may include a receiver 910, a transmitter 915, and a communications manager 920. The device 905, or one or more components of the device 905 (e.g., the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, the communications manager 920) , may include at least one processor, which may be coupled with at least one memory, to support the described techniques. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The receiver 910 may provide a means for receiving information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 905. The receiver 910 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
The transmitter 915 may provide a means for transmitting signals generated by other components of the device 905. For example, the transmitter 915 may transmit information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) . In some examples, the transmitter 915 may be co-located with a receiver 910 in a transceiver module. The transmitter 915 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
The device 905, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein. For example, the communications manager 920 may include a reference signal component 925 a frequency offset component 930, or any combination thereof. The communications manager 920 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 820 as described herein. In some examples, the communications manager 920, or various components thereof, may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or both. For example, the communications manager 920 may receive information from the receiver 910, send information to the transmitter 915, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
The reference signal component 925 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The reference signal component 925 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The frequency offset component 930 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first
TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
FIG. 10 shows a block diagram 1000 of a communications manager 1020 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The communications manager 1020 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 820, a communications manager 920, or both, as described herein. The communications manager 1020, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein. For example, the communications manager 1020 may include a reference signal component 1025, a frequency offset component 1030, a capability component 1035, a period component 1040, or any combination thereof. Each of these components, or components or subcomponents thereof (e.g., one or more processors, one or more memories) , may communicate, directly or indirectly, with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. In some examples, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The frequency offset component 1030 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
In some examples, to support receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal.
In some examples, to support receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
In some examples, to support receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources. In some examples, to support receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
In some examples, to support receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, based on an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal. In some examples, to support receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, based on the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
In some examples, the first interval is equal to the second interval.
In some examples, the first occasion is within a first threshold duration. In some examples, the second occasion is within a second threshold duration.
In some examples, the frequency offset is greater than or equal to a minimum frequency offset value associated with antennas of the UE and is less than or equal to a maximum frequency offset value associated with the antennas of the UE.
In some examples, the capability component 1035 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting information indicating a capability of the UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
In some examples, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, where at least one of the additional reference signals of the first burst is received between the first reference signal and the second reference signal. In some examples, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, where at least one of the additional reference signals of the second burst is received between the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal.
In some examples, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, where the additional reference signals of the first burst are received before the first reference signal or after the second reference signal. In some examples, the reference signal component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, where the additional reference signals of the second burst are received before the third reference signal or after the fourth reference signal.
In some examples, the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
In some examples, the period component 1040 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a signal indicating a period for receiving the first burst and the second burst, where the first interval or the second interval is based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
FIG. 11 shows a diagram of a system 1100 including a device 1105 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 1105 may be an example of or include components of a device 805, a device 905, or a UE 115 as described herein. The device 1105 may communicate (e.g., wirelessly) with one or more other devices (e.g., network entities 105, UEs 115, or a combination thereof) . The device 1105 may include components for bi-directional voice and data communications including components for transmitting and receiving communications, such as a communications manager 1120, an input/output (I/O) controller, such as an I/O controller 1110, a transceiver 1115, one or more antennas 1125, at least one memory 1130, code 1135, and at least one processor 1140. These components may be in electronic communication or otherwise coupled (e.g., operatively, communicatively, functionally, electronically, electrically) via one or more buses (e.g., a bus 1145) .
The I/O controller 1110 may manage input and output signals for the device 1105. The I/O controller 1110 may also manage peripherals not integrated into the device 1105. In some cases, the I/O controller 1110 may represent a physical connection or port to an external peripheral. In some cases, the I/O controller 1110 may utilize an operating system such as
or another known operating system. Additionally, or alternatively, the I/O controller 1110 may represent or interact with a modem, a keyboard, a mouse, a touchscreen, or a similar device. In some cases, the I/O controller 1110 may be implemented as part of one or more processors, such as the at least one processor 1140. In some cases, a user may interact with the device 1105 via the I/O controller 1110 or via hardware components controlled by the I/O controller 1110.
In some cases, the device 1105 may include a single antenna. However, in some other cases, the device 1105 may have more than one antenna, which may be capable of concurrently transmitting or receiving multiple wireless transmissions. The transceiver 1115 may communicate bi-directionally via the one or more antennas 1125
using wired or wireless links as described herein. For example, the transceiver 1115 may represent a wireless transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wireless transceiver. The transceiver 1115 may also include a modem to modulate the packets, to provide the modulated packets to one or more antennas 1125 for transmission, and to demodulate packets received from the one or more antennas 1125. The transceiver 1115, or the transceiver 1115 and one or more antennas 1125, may be an example of a transmitter 815, a transmitter 915, a receiver 810, a receiver 910, or any combination thereof or component thereof, as described herein.
The at least one memory 1130 may include random access memory (RAM) and read-only memory (ROM) . The at least one memory 1130 may store computer-readable, computer-executable, or processor-executable code, such as the code 1135. The code 1135 may include instructions that, when executed by the at least one processor 1140, cause the device 1105 to perform various functions described herein. The code 1135 may be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable medium such as system memory or another type of memory. In some cases, the code 1135 may not be directly executable by the at least one processor 1140 but may cause a computer (e.g., when compiled and executed) to perform functions described herein. In some cases, the at least one memory 1130 may include, among other things, a basic I/O system (BIOS) which may control basic hardware or software operation such as the interaction with peripheral components or devices.
The at least one processor 1140 may include one or more intelligent hardware devices (e.g., one or more general-purpose processors, one or more DSPs, one or more central processing units (CPUs) , one or more graphics processing units (GPUs) , one or more neural processing units (NPUs) (also referred to as neural network processors or deep learning processors (DLPs) ) , one or more microcontrollers, one or more ASICs, one or more FPGAs, one or more programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, one or more discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof) . In some cases, the at least one processor 1140 may be configured to operate a memory array using a memory controller. In some other cases, a memory controller may be integrated into the at least one processor 1140. The at least one processor 1140 may be configured to execute computer-readable instructions stored in a memory (e.g., the at least one memory 1130) to cause the device 1105 to perform various functions
(e.g., functions or tasks supporting reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) . For example, the device 1105 or a component of the device 1105 may include at least one processor 1140 and at least one memory 1130 coupled with or to the at least one processor 1140, the at least one processor 1140 and the at least one memory 1130 configured to perform various functions described herein. In some examples, the at least one processor 1140 may include multiple processors and the at least one memory 1130 may include multiple memories. One or more of the multiple processors may be coupled with one or more of the multiple memories, which may, individually or collectively, be configured to perform various functions described herein. In some examples, the at least one processor 1140 may be a component of a processing system, which may refer to a system (such as a series) of machines, circuitry (including, for example, one or both of processor circuitry (which may include the at least one processor 1140) and memory circuitry (which may include the at least one memory 1130) ) , or components, that receives or obtains inputs and processes the inputs to produce, generate, or obtain a set of outputs. The processing system may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein. For example, the at least one processor 1140 or a processing system including the at least one processor 1140 may be configured to, configurable to, or operable to cause the device 1105 to perform one or more of the functions described herein. Further, as described herein, being “configured to, ” being “configurable to, ” and being “operable to” may be used interchangeably and may be associated with a capability, when executing code 1135 (e.g., processor-executable code) stored in the at least one memory 1130 or otherwise, to perform one or more of the functions described herein.
For example, the communications manager 1120 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The communications manager 1120 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a
second interval from the first occasion. The communications manager 1120 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
By including or configuring the communications manager 1120 in accordance with examples as described herein, the device 1105 may support techniques for improved communication reliability, reduced latency, reduced power consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources, improved coordination between devices, longer battery life, or improved utilization of processing capability.
In some examples, the communications manager 1120 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, monitoring, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the transceiver 1115, the one or more antennas 1125, or any combination thereof. Although the communications manager 1120 is illustrated as a separate component, in some examples, one or more functions described with reference to the communications manager 1120 may be supported by or performed by the at least one processor 1140, the at least one memory 1130, the code 1135, or any combination thereof. For example, the code 1135 may include instructions executable by the at least one processor 1140 to cause the device 1105 to perform various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein, or the at least one processor 1140 and the at least one memory 1130 may be otherwise configured to, individually or collectively, perform or support such operations.
FIG. 12 shows a block diagram 1200 of a device 1205 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 1205 may be an example of aspects of a network entity 105 as described herein. The device 1205 may include a receiver 1210, a transmitter 1215, and a communications manager 1220. The device 1205, or one or more components of the device 1205 (e.g., the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, the communications manager 1220) , may include at least one processor, which may be coupled with at least one memory, to, individually or collectively, support or enable the described techniques. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The receiver 1210 may provide a means for obtaining (e.g., receiving, determining, identifying) information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 1205. In some examples, the receiver 1210 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the receiver 1210 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
The transmitter 1215 may provide a means for outputting (e.g., transmitting, providing, conveying, sending) information generated by other components of the device 1205. For example, the transmitter 1215 may output information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) . In some examples, the transmitter 1215 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the transmitter 1215 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof. In some examples, the transmitter 1215 and the receiver 1210 may be co-located in a transceiver, which may include or be coupled with a modem.
The communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be examples of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein. For example, the communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be capable of performing one or more of the functions described herein.
In some examples, the communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in hardware (e.g., in communications management circuitry) . The hardware may include
at least one of a processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA or other programmable logic device, a microcontroller, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure. In some examples, at least one processor and at least one memory coupled with the at least one processor may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein (e.g., by one or more processors, individually or collectively, executing instructions stored in the at least one memory) .
Additionally, or alternatively, the communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in code (e.g., as communications management software or firmware) executed by at least one processor (e.g., referred to as a processor-executable code) . If implemented in code executed by at least one processor, the functions of the communications manager 1220, the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or various combinations or components thereof may be performed by a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA, a microcontroller, or any combination of these or other programmable logic devices (e.g., configured as or otherwise supporting, individually or collectively, a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure) .
In some examples, the communications manager 1220 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or both. For example, the communications manager 1220 may receive information from the receiver 1210, send information to the transmitter 1215, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
For example, the communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The communications manager
1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
By including or configuring the communications manager 1220 in accordance with examples as described herein, the device 1205 (e.g., at least one processor controlling or otherwise coupled with the receiver 1210, the transmitter 1215, the communications manager 1220, or a combination thereof) may support techniques for reduced processing, reduced power consumption, or more efficient utilization of communication resources.
FIG. 13 shows a block diagram 1300 of a device 1305 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 1305 may be an example of aspects of a device 1205 or a network entity 105 as described herein. The device 1305 may include a receiver 1310, a transmitter 1315, and a communications manager 1320. The device 1305, or one or more components of the device 1305 (e.g., the receiver 1310, the transmitter 1315, the communications manager 1320) , may include at least one processor, which may be coupled with at least one memory, to support the described techniques. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The receiver 1310 may provide a means for obtaining (e.g., receiving, determining, identifying) information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 1305. In some examples, the receiver 1310 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the receiver 1310 may support obtaining information by
receiving signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
The transmitter 1315 may provide a means for outputting (e.g., transmitting, providing, conveying, sending) information generated by other components of the device 1305. For example, the transmitter 1315 may output information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) . In some examples, the transmitter 1315 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the transmitter 1315 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof. In some examples, the transmitter 1315 and the receiver 1310 may be co-located in a transceiver, which may include or be coupled with a modem.
The device 1305, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein. For example, the communications manager 1320 may include a reference signal manager 1325 a frequency offset manager 1330, or any combination thereof. The communications manager 1320 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 1220 as described herein. In some examples, the communications manager 1320, or various components thereof, may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 1310, the transmitter 1315, or both. For example, the communications manager 1320 may receive information from the receiver 1310, send information to the transmitter 1315, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 1310, the transmitter 1315, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
The reference signal manager 1325 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first
occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The reference signal manager 1325 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The frequency offset manager 1330 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
FIG. 14 shows a block diagram 1400 of a communications manager 1420 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The communications manager 1420 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 1220, a communications manager 1320, or both, as described herein. The communications manager 1420, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein. For example, the communications manager 1420 may include a reference signal manager 1425, a frequency offset manager 1430, a capability manager 1435, a period manager 1440, or any combination thereof. Each of these components, or components or subcomponents thereof (e.g., one or more processors, one or more memories) , may communicate, directly or indirectly, with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) . The communications may include communications within a protocol layer of a protocol stack, communications associated with a logical channel of a protocol stack (e.g., between protocol layers of a protocol stack, within a device, component, or virtualized component associated with a network entity 105, between devices, components, or virtualized components associated with a network entity 105) , or any combination thereof.
The reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval
from the first occasion. In some examples, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The frequency offset manager 1430 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
In some examples, to support outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal. In some examples, to support outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
In some examples, to support outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources. In some examples, to support outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal and during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
In some examples, to support outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting, in association with an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, where the
second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal. In some examples, to support outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the reference signal manager 1425 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting, in association with the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, where the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
In some examples, the capability manager 1435 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for obtaining information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
In some examples, the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
In some examples, the period manager 1440 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a signal indicating a period for outputting the first burst and the second burst, where the first interval or the second interval is based on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
FIG. 15 shows a diagram of a system 1500 including a device 1505 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 1505 may be an example of or include components of a device 1205, a device 1305, or a network entity 105 as described herein. The device 1505 may communicate with other network devices or network equipment such as one or more of the network entities 105, UEs 115, or any combination thereof. The communications may include communications over one or more wired interfaces, over one or more wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof. The device 1505 may include components that support outputting and obtaining communications, such as a communications manager 1520, a transceiver 1510, one or more antennas 1515, at least one memory 1525, code 1530, and at least one processor 1535. These components may be in electronic communication or otherwise coupled
(e.g., operatively, communicatively, functionally, electronically, electrically) via one or more buses (e.g., a bus 1540) .
The transceiver 1510 may support bi-directional communications via wired links, wireless links, or both as described herein. In some examples, the transceiver 1510 may include a wired transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wired transceiver. Additionally, or alternatively, in some examples, the transceiver 1510 may include a wireless transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wireless transceiver. In some examples, the device 1505 may include one or more antennas 1515, which may be capable of transmitting or receiving wireless transmissions (e.g., concurrently) . The transceiver 1510 may also include a modem to modulate signals, to provide the modulated signals for transmission (e.g., by one or more antennas 1515, by a wired transmitter) , to receive modulated signals (e.g., from one or more antennas 1515, from a wired receiver) , and to demodulate signals. In some implementations, the transceiver 1510 may include one or more interfaces, such as one or more interfaces coupled with the one or more antennas 1515 that are configured to support various receiving or obtaining operations, or one or more interfaces coupled with the one or more antennas 1515 that are configured to support various transmitting or outputting operations, or a combination thereof. In some implementations, the transceiver 1510 may include or be configured for coupling with one or more processors or one or more memory components that are operable to perform or support operations based on received or obtained information or signals, or to generate information or other signals for transmission or other outputting, or any combination thereof. In some implementations, the transceiver 1510, or the transceiver 1510 and the one or more antennas 1515, or the transceiver 1510 and the one or more antennas 1515 and one or more processors or one or more memory components (e.g., the at least one processor 1535, the at least one memory 1525, or both) , may be included in a chip or chip assembly that is installed in the device 1505. In some examples, the transceiver 1510 may be operable to support communications via one or more communications links (e.g., communication link (s) 125, backhaul communication link (s) 120, a midhaul communication link 162, a fronthaul communication link 168) .
The at least one memory 1525 may include RAM, ROM, or any combination thereof. The at least one memory 1525 may store computer-readable, computer-
executable, or processor-executable code, such as the code 1530. The code 1530 may include instructions that, when executed by one or more of the at least one processor 1535, cause the device 1505 to perform various functions described herein. The code 1530 may be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable medium such as system memory or another type of memory. In some cases, the code 1530 may not be directly executable by a processor of the at least one processor 1535 but may cause a computer (e.g., when compiled and executed) to perform functions described herein. In some cases, the at least one memory 1525 may include, among other things, a BIOS which may control basic hardware or software operation such as the interaction with peripheral components or devices. In some examples, the at least one processor 1535 may include multiple processors and the at least one memory 1525 may include multiple memories. One or more of the multiple processors may be coupled with one or more of the multiple memories which may, individually or collectively, be configured to perform various functions herein (for example, as part of a processing system) .
The at least one processor 1535 may include one or more intelligent hardware devices (e.g., one or more general-purpose processors, one or more DSPs, one or more central processing units (CPUs) , one or more graphics processing units (GPUs) , one or more neural processing units (NPUs) (also referred to as neural network processors or deep learning processors (DLPs) ) , one or more microcontrollers, one or more ASICs, one or more FPGAs, one or more programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, one or more discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof) . In some cases, the at least one processor 1535 may be configured to operate a memory array using a memory controller. In some other cases, a memory controller may be integrated into one or more of the at least one processor 1535. The at least one processor 1535 may be configured to execute computer-readable instructions stored in a memory (e.g., one or more of the at least one memory 1525) to cause the device 1505 to perform various functions (e.g., functions or tasks supporting reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs) . For example, the device 1505 or a component of the device 1505 may include at least one processor 1535 and at least one memory 1525 coupled with one or more of the at least one processor 1535, the at least one processor 1535 and the at least one memory 1525 configured to perform various functions described herein. The at least one processor 1535 may be an example of a cloud-
computing platform (e.g., one or more physical nodes and supporting software such as operating systems, virtual machines, or container instances) that may host the functions (e.g., by executing code 1530) to perform the functions of the device 1505. The at least one processor 1535 may be any one or more suitable processors capable of executing scripts or instructions of one or more software programs stored in the device 1505 (such as within one or more of the at least one memory 1525) . In some examples, the at least one processor 1535 may include multiple processors and the at least one memory 1525 may include multiple memories. One or more of the multiple processors may be coupled with one or more of the multiple memories, which may, individually or collectively, be configured to perform various functions herein. In some examples, the at least one processor 1535 may be a component of a processing system, which may refer to a system (such as a series) of machines, circuitry (including, for example, one or both of processor circuitry (which may include the at least one processor 1535) and memory circuitry (which may include the at least one memory 1525) ) , or components, that receives or obtains inputs and processes the inputs to produce, generate, or obtain a set of outputs. The processing system may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein. For example, the at least one processor 1535 or a processing system including the at least one processor 1535 may be configured to, configurable to, or operable to cause the device 1505 to perform one or more of the functions described herein. Further, as described herein, being “configured to, ” being “configurable to, ” and being “operable to” may be used interchangeably and may be associated with a capability, when executing code stored in the at least one memory 1525 or otherwise, to perform one or more of the functions described herein.
In some examples, a bus 1540 may support communications of (e.g., within) a protocol layer of a protocol stack. In some examples, a bus 1540 may support communications associated with a logical channel of a protocol stack (e.g., between protocol layers of a protocol stack) , which may include communications performed within a component of the device 1505, or between different components of the device 1505 that may be co-located or located in different locations (e.g., where the device 1505 may refer to a system in which one or more of the communications manager 1520, the transceiver 1510, the at least one memory 1525, the code 1530, and the at least one
processor 1535 may be located in one of the different components or divided between different components) .
In some examples, the communications manager 1520 may manage aspects of communications with a core network 130 (e.g., via one or more wired or wireless backhaul links) . For example, the communications manager 1520 may manage the transfer of data communications for client devices, such as one or more UEs 115. In some examples, the communications manager 1520 may manage communications with one or more other network entities 105, and may include a controller or scheduler for controlling communications with UEs 115 (e.g., in cooperation with the one or more other network devices) . In some examples, the communications manager 1520 may support an X2 interface within an LTE/LTE-A wireless communications network technology to provide communication between network entities 105.
For example, the communications manager 1520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The communications manager 1520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The communications manager 1520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
By including or configuring the communications manager 1520 in accordance with examples as described herein, the device 1505 may support techniques for improved communication reliability, reduced latency, reduced power consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources, improved coordination between devices, longer battery life, or improved utilization of processing capability.
In some examples, the communications manager 1520 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the transceiver 1510, the one or more antennas 1515 (e.g., where applicable) , or any combination thereof. Although the communications manager 1520 is illustrated as a separate component, in some examples, one or more functions described with reference to the communications manager 1520 may be supported by or performed by the transceiver 1510, one or more of the at least one processor 1535, one or more of the at least one memory 1525, the code 1530, or any combination thereof (for example, by a processing system including at least a portion of the at least one processor 1535, the at least one memory 1525, the code 1530, or any combination thereof) . For example, the code 1530 may include instructions executable by one or more of the at least one processor 1535 to cause the device 1505 to perform various aspects of reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs as described herein, or the at least one processor 1535 and the at least one memory 1525 may be otherwise configured to, individually or collectively, perform or support such operations.
FIG. 16 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1600 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The operations of the method 1600 may be implemented by a UE or its components as described herein. For example, the operations of the method 1600 may be performed by a UE 115 as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 11. In some examples, a UE may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the UE to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the UE may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
At 1605, the method may include receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The operations of 1605 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1605 may be performed by a reference signal component 1025 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
At 1610, the method may include receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The operations of 1610 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1610 may be performed by a reference signal component 1025 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
At 1615, the method may include transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals. The operations of 1615 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1615 may be performed by a frequency offset component 1030 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
FIG. 17 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1700 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The operations of the method 1700 may be implemented by a UE or its components as described herein. For example, the operations of the method 1700 may be performed by a UE 115 as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 11. In some examples, a UE may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the UE to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the UE may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
At 1705, the method may include transmitting information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between a first occasion and a second occasion or associated with an accuracy of a frequency offset. The operations of 1705 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1705 may be performed by a capability component 1035 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
At 1710, the method may include receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during the first occasion and the second reference signal during a
second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The operations of 1710 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1710 may be performed by a reference signal component 1025 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
At 1715, the method may include receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The operations of 1715 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1715 may be performed by a reference signal component 1025 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
At 1720, the method may include transmitting an indication of the frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals. The operations of 1720 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1720 may be performed by a frequency offset component 1030 as described with reference to FIG. 10.
FIG. 18 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1800 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The operations of the method 1800 may be implemented by a network entity or its components as described herein. For example, the operations of the method 1800 may be performed by a network entity as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 7 and 12 through 15. In some examples, a network entity may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the network entity to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the network entity may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
At 1805, the method may include outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The operations of 1805 may be
performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1805 may be performed by a reference signal manager 1425 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
At 1810, the method may include outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The operations of 1810 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1810 may be performed by a reference signal manager 1425 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
At 1815, the method may include receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals. The operations of 1815 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1815 may be performed by a frequency offset manager 1430 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
FIG. 19 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1900 that supports reference signals for frequency offsets between TRPs in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The operations of the method 1900 may be implemented by a network entity or its components as described herein. For example, the operations of the method 1900 may be performed by a network entity as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 7 and 12 through 15. In some examples, a network entity may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the network entity to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the network entity may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
At 1905, the method may include obtaining information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between a first occasion and a second occasion or associated with an accuracy of a frequency offset. The operations of 1905 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1905 may be performed by a capability manager 1435 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
At 1910, the method may include outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst including a first reference signal during the first occasion and a second reference signal during the second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion. The operations of 1910 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1910 may be performed by a reference signal manager 1425 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
At 1915, the method may include outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst including a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion. The operations of 1915 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1915 may be performed by a reference signal manager 1425 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
At 1920, the method may include receiving an indication of the frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals. The operations of 1920 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1920 may be performed by a frequency offset manager 1430 as described with reference to FIG. 14.
The following provides an overview of aspects of the present disclosure:
Aspect 1: A method for wireless communications at a UE, comprising: receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst comprising a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion; receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst comprising a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion; and transmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based at least in part on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
Aspect 2: The method of aspect 1, wherein receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: receiving, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal; and receiving, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
Aspect 3: The method of aspect 1, wherein receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: receiving the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources; and receiving the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
Aspect 4: The method of any of aspects 1 through 3, wherein receiving the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: receiving, based at least in part on an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal; and receiving, based at least in part on the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
Aspect 5: The method of any of aspects 1 through 4, wherein the first interval is equal to the second interval.
Aspect 6: The method of any of aspects 1 through 5, wherein the first occasion is within a first threshold duration, and the second occasion is within a second threshold duration.
Aspect 7: The method of any of aspects 1 through 6, wherein the frequency offset is greater than or equal to a minimum frequency offset value associated with antennas of the UE and is less than or equal to a maximum frequency offset value associated with the antennas of the UE.
Aspect 8: The method of any of aspects 1 through 7, further comprising: transmitting information indicating a capability of the UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
Aspect 9: The method of any of aspects 1 through 8, further comprising: receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, wherein at least one of the additional reference signals of the first burst is received between the first reference signal and the second reference signal; and receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, wherein at least one of the additional reference signals of the second burst is received between the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal.
Aspect 10: The method of any of aspects 1 through 9, further comprising: receiving additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, wherein the additional reference signals of the first burst are received before the first reference signal or after the second reference signal; and receiving additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, wherein the additional reference signals of the second burst are received before the third reference signal or after the fourth reference signal.
Aspect 11: The method of any of aspects 1 through 10, wherein the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
Aspect 12: The method of any of aspects 1 through 3 and 5 through 11, further comprising: receiving a signal indicating a period for receiving the first burst
and the second burst, wherein the first interval or the second interval is based at least in part on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
Aspect 13: A method for wireless communications at a network entity, comprising: outputting a first burst of reference signals associated with a first TRP and a first QCL value, the first burst comprising a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion; outputting a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst comprising a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion; and receiving an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based at least in part on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
Aspect 14: The method of aspect 13, wherein outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: outputting, via a first set of CSI-RS resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal; and outputting, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
Aspect 15: The method of aspect 13, wherein outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: outputting the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of CSI-RS resources; and outputting the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal and during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
Aspect 16: The method of any of aspects 13 through 15, wherein outputting the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals comprises: outputting, in association with an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal; and outputting, in association with the aperiodic
trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
Aspect 17: The method of any of aspects 13 through 16, further comprising: obtaining information indicating a capability of a UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
Aspect 18: The method of any of aspects 13 through 17, wherein the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
Aspect 19: The method of any of aspects 13 through 15, 17, and 18, further comprising: outputting a signal indicating a period for outputting the first burst and the second burst, wherein the first interval or the second interval is based at least in part on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
Aspect 20: A UE comprising one or more memories storing processor-executable code, and one or more processors coupled with the one or more memories and individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the UE to perform a method of any of aspects 1 through 12.
Aspect 21: A UE comprising at least one means for performing a method of any of aspects 1 through 12.
Aspect 22: A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code the code comprising instructions executable by one or more processors to perform a method of any of aspects 1 through 12.
Aspect 23: A network entity comprising one or more memories storing processor-executable code, and one or more processors coupled with the one or more memories and individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to perform a method of any of aspects 13 through 19.
Aspect 24: A network entity comprising at least one means for performing a method of any of aspects 13 through 19.
Aspect 25: A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code the code comprising instructions executable by one or more processors to perform a method of any of aspects 13 through 19.
It should be noted that the methods described herein describe possible implementations. The operations and the steps may be rearranged or otherwise modified and other implementations are possible. Further, aspects from two or more of the methods may be combined.
Although aspects of an LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR system may be described for purposes of example, and LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR terminology may be used in much of the description, the techniques described herein are applicable beyond LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR networks. For example, the described techniques may be applicable to various other wireless communications systems such as Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB) , Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 (Wi-Fi) , IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX) , IEEE 802.20, Flash-OFDM, as well as other systems and radio technologies not explicitly mentioned herein.
Information and signals described herein may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies and techniques. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips that may be referenced throughout the description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, optical fields or particles, or any combination thereof.
The various illustrative blocks and components described in connection with the disclosure herein may be implemented or performed using a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, a CPU, a graphics processing unit (GPU) , a neural processing unit (NPU) , an FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor but, in the alternative, the processor may be any processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. A processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices (e.g., a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core,
or any other such configuration) . Any functions or operations described herein as being capable of being performed by a processor may be performed by multiple processors that, individually or collectively, are capable of performing the described functions or operations.
The functions described herein may be implemented using hardware, software executed by a processor, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented using software executed by a processor, the functions may be stored as or transmitted using one or more instructions or code of a computer-readable medium. Other examples and implementations are within the scope of the disclosure and appended claims. For example, due to the nature of software, functions described herein may be implemented using software executed by a processor, hardware, firmware, hardwiring, or combinations of any of these. Features implementing functions may also be physically located at various positions, including being distributed such that portions of functions are implemented at different physical locations.
Computer-readable media includes both non-transitory computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one location to another. A non-transitory storage medium may be any available medium that may be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer. By way of example, and not limitation, non-transitory computer-readable media may include RAM, ROM, electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM) , flash memory, compact disk (CD) ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other non-transitory medium that may be used to carry or store desired program code means in the form of instructions or data structures and that may be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer or a general-purpose or special-purpose processor. Also, any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium. For example, if the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL) , or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave, then the coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of computer-readable medium. Disk and disc, as used herein, include CD, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD) , floppy disk, and Blu-ray disc. Disks may
reproduce data magnetically, and discs may reproduce data optically using lasers. Combinations of the above are also included within the scope of computer-readable media. Any functions or operations described herein as being capable of being performed by a memory may be performed by multiple memories that, individually or collectively, are capable of performing the described functions or operations.
As used herein, including in the claims, “or” as used in a list of items (e.g., a list of items prefaced by a phrase such as “at least one of” or “one or more of” ) indicates an inclusive list such that, for example, a list of at least one of A, B, or C means A or B or C or AB or AC or BC or ABC (i.e., A and B and C) . Also, as used herein, the phrase “based on” shall not be construed as a reference to a closed set of conditions. For example, an example step that is described as “based on condition A” may be based on both a condition A and a condition B without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. In other words, as used herein, the phrase “based on” shall be construed in the same manner as the phrase “based at least in part on. ”
As used herein, including in the claims, the article “a” before a noun is open-ended and understood to refer to “at least one” of those nouns or “one or more” of those nouns. Thus, the terms “a, ” “at least one, ” “one or more, ” and “at least one of one or more” may be interchangeable. For example, if a claim recites “a component” that performs one or more functions, each of the individual functions may be performed by a single component or by any combination of multiple components. Thus, the term “acomponent” having characteristics or performing functions may refer to “at least one of one or more components” having a particular characteristic or performing a particular function. Subsequent reference to a component introduced with the article “a” using the terms “the” or “said” may refer to any or all of the one or more components. For example, a component introduced with the article “a” may be understood to mean “one or more components, ” and referring to “the component” subsequently in the claims may be understood to be equivalent to referring to “at least one of the one or more components. ” Similarly, subsequent reference to a component introduced as “one or more components” using the terms “the” or “said” may refer to any or all of the one or more components. For example, referring to “the one or more components” subsequently in the claims may be understood to be equivalent to referring to “at least one of the one or more components. ”
The term “determine” or “determining” encompasses a variety of actions and, therefore, “determining” can include calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up (such as via looking up in a table, a database, or another data structure) , ascertaining, and the like. Also, “determining” can include receiving (e.g., receiving information) , accessing (e.g., accessing data stored in memory) , and the like. Also, “determining” can include resolving, obtaining, selecting, choosing, establishing, and other such similar actions.
In the appended figures, similar components or features may have the same reference label. Further, various components of the same type may be distinguished by following the reference label by a dash and a second label that distinguishes among the similar components. If just the first reference label is used in the specification, the description is applicable to any one of the similar components having the same first reference label irrespective of the second reference label or other subsequent reference label.
The description set forth herein, in connection with the appended drawings, describes example configurations and does not represent all the examples that may be implemented or that are within the scope of the claims. The term “example” used herein means “serving as an example, instance, or illustration” and not “preferred” or “advantageous over other examples. ” The detailed description includes specific details for the purpose of providing an understanding of the described techniques. These techniques, however, may be practiced without these specific details. In some figures, known structures and devices are shown in block diagram form in order to avoid obscuring the concepts of the described examples.
The description herein is provided to enable a person having ordinary skill in the art to make or use the disclosure. Various modifications to the disclosure will be apparent to a person having ordinary skill in the art, and the generic principles defined herein may be applied to other variations without departing from the scope of the disclosure. Thus, the disclosure is not limited to the examples and designs described herein but is to be accorded the broadest scope consistent with the principles and novel features disclosed herein.
Claims (20)
- A user equipment (UE) , comprising:one or more memories storing processor-executable code; andone or more processors coupled with the one or more memories and individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the UE to:receive a first burst of reference signals associated with a first transmission-reception point (TRP) and a first quasi co-location (QCL) value, the first burst comprising a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion;receive a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst comprising a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion; andtransmit an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based at least in part on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein, to receive the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the one or more processors are individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the UE to:receive, via a first set of channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal; andreceive, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein, to receive the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the one or more processors are individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the UE to:receive the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) resources; andreceive the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein, to receive the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the one or more processors are individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the UE to:receive, based at least in part on an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is received after the first interval from the first reference signal; andreceive, based at least in part on the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is received after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein the first interval is equal to the second interval.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein:the first occasion is within a first threshold duration, andthe second occasion is within a second threshold duration.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein the frequency offset is greater than or equal to a minimum frequency offset value associated with antennas of the UE and is less than or equal to a maximum frequency offset value associated with the antennas of the UE.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein the one or more processors are individually or collectively further operable to execute the code to cause the UE to:transmit information indicating a capability of the UE associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein the one or more processors are individually or collectively further operable to execute the code to cause the UE to:receive additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, wherein at least one of the additional reference signals of the first burst is received between the first reference signal and the second reference signal; andreceive additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, wherein at least one of the additional reference signals of the second burst is received between the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein the one or more processors are individually or collectively further operable to execute the code to cause the UE to:receive additional reference signals of the first burst during additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the first interval, wherein the additional reference signals of the first burst are received before the first reference signal or after the second reference signal; andreceive additional reference signals of the second burst during the additional occasions that are separated from each other by an additional interval whose duration is equal to the second interval, wherein the additional reference signals of the second burst are received before the third reference signal or after the fourth reference signal.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
- The UE of claim 1, wherein the one or more processors are individually or collectively further operable to execute the code to cause the UE to:receive a signal indicating a period for receiving the first burst and the second burst, wherein the first interval or the second interval is based at least in part on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
- A network entity, comprising:one or more memories storing processor-executable code; andone or more processors coupled with the one or more memories and individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to:output a first burst of reference signals associated with a first transmission-reception point (TRP) and a first quasi co-location (QCL) value, the first burst comprising a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion;output a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst comprising a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion; andreceive an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based at least in part on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
- The network entity of claim 13, wherein, to output the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the one or more processors are individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to:output, via a first set of channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) resources, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal; andoutput, via a second set of CSI-RS resources, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- The network entity of claim 13, wherein, to output the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the one or more processors are individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to:output the first reference signal and the third reference signal during the first occasion via a first set of channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) resources; andoutput the second reference signal and the fourth reference signal and during the second occasion via a second set of CSI-RS resources.
- The network entity of claim 13, wherein, to output the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals, the one or more processors are individually or collectively operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to:output, in association with an aperiodic trigger, the first reference signal and the second reference signal, wherein the second reference signal is output after the first interval from the first reference signal; andoutput, in association with the aperiodic trigger, the third reference signal and the fourth reference signal, wherein the fourth reference signal is output after the second interval from the third reference signal.
- The network entity of claim 13, wherein the one or more processors are individually or collectively further operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to:obtain information indicating a capability of a user equipment (UE) associated with a duration between the first occasion and the second occasion or associated with an accuracy of the frequency offset.
- The network entity of claim 13, wherein the first reference signal is associated with a resource set for tracking reference signaling or a resource set for tracking reference signaling is associated with the first TRP with the first QCL value and at least one tracking reference signal is received with a timing of the first interval relative to the first reference signal or the first occasion.
- The network entity of claim 13, wherein the one or more processors are individually or collectively further operable to execute the code to cause the network entity to:output a signal indicating a period for outputting the first burst and the second burst, wherein the first interval or the second interval is based at least in part on a first time offset and a second time offset relative to the period.
- A method for wireless communications at a user equipment (UE) , comprising:receiving a first burst of reference signals associated with a first transmission-reception point (TRP) and a first quasi co-location (QCL) value, the first burst comprising a first reference signal during a first occasion and a second reference signal during a second occasion after a first interval from the first occasion;receiving a second burst of reference signals associated with a second TRP and a second QCL value separate from the first QCL value, the second burst comprising a third reference signal during the first occasion and a fourth reference signal during the second occasion after a second interval from the first occasion; andtransmitting an indication of a frequency offset between the first TRP and the second TRP based at least in part on the first burst of reference signals and the second burst of reference signals.
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/079258 WO2025179524A1 (en) | 2024-02-29 | 2024-02-29 | Reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception points |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/079258 WO2025179524A1 (en) | 2024-02-29 | 2024-02-29 | Reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception points |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025179524A1 true WO2025179524A1 (en) | 2025-09-04 |
Family
ID=96919747
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/079258 Pending WO2025179524A1 (en) | 2024-02-29 | 2024-02-29 | Reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception points |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025179524A1 (en) |
Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN115883305A (en) * | 2021-09-29 | 2023-03-31 | 华为技术有限公司 | Time-frequency synchronization method, device and storage medium |
| US20230224126A1 (en) * | 2022-01-07 | 2023-07-13 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting or receiving reference signal in wireless communication system |
| US20230291440A1 (en) * | 2020-08-13 | 2023-09-14 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods for measuring and reporting doppler shift |
-
2024
- 2024-02-29 WO PCT/CN2024/079258 patent/WO2025179524A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20230291440A1 (en) * | 2020-08-13 | 2023-09-14 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods for measuring and reporting doppler shift |
| CN115883305A (en) * | 2021-09-29 | 2023-03-31 | 华为技术有限公司 | Time-frequency synchronization method, device and storage medium |
| US20230224126A1 (en) * | 2022-01-07 | 2023-07-13 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting or receiving reference signal in wireless communication system |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
| Title |
|---|
| INTEL CORPORATION: "On RS Enhancement to Support Multi-TRP Operation", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1808718 ON RS ENHANCEMENT TO SUPPORT MULTI-TRP OPERATION, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Gothenburg, Sweden; 20180820 - 20180824, 11 August 2018 (2018-08-11), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051516092 * |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| WO2023184062A1 (en) | Channel state information resource configurations for beam prediction | |
| WO2023220950A1 (en) | Per transmission and reception point power control for uplink single frequency network operation | |
| US12356393B2 (en) | Sounding reference signal resource configuration for transmission antenna ports | |
| EP4635097A1 (en) | Channel state feedback reporting during beam refinement | |
| WO2024000221A1 (en) | Transmission configuration indicator state selection for reference signals in multi transmission and reception point operation | |
| US12532280B2 (en) | Uplink synchronization refinement for inter-cell mobility | |
| WO2024164106A1 (en) | Scheduling for frequency bands associated with a first band changing capability after a transmit chain switch | |
| US12464388B2 (en) | Beam failure detection reference signal set update | |
| US12532324B2 (en) | Techniques for dynamic transmission parameter adaptation | |
| US12295064B2 (en) | Monitoring for periodic signals during non-uniform discontinuous reception cycles | |
| WO2024007093A1 (en) | Per-transmission and reception point (trp) power control parameters | |
| US12418813B2 (en) | Unified transmission configuration indicator state indication for cross-link interference measurement | |
| WO2025179524A1 (en) | Reference signals for frequency offsets between transmission-reception points | |
| WO2025208403A1 (en) | Mapping of reference signals to transmission configuration indicators for beam management and reporting | |
| WO2025179416A1 (en) | Separate power control adjustment state configurations for sounding reference signals | |
| US20240154665A1 (en) | Reporting quantity of transmit antennas for wireless communications | |
| WO2025171576A1 (en) | Low power wake up radio windows | |
| WO2026020301A1 (en) | Sounding reference signal enhancement for uplink beam management | |
| WO2026020300A1 (en) | Sounding reference signal enhancement for uplink beam management | |
| US20250310813A1 (en) | User equipment (ue) and network actions based on layer 3 (l3) cell and beam predictions | |
| WO2024031517A1 (en) | Unified transmission configuration indication determination for single frequency network | |
| WO2025030255A1 (en) | Concurrent time domain channel property and beam management resource counting | |
| US20250260971A1 (en) | Techniques for resolving uplink and downlink collisions in non-terrestrial networks | |
| WO2025118233A1 (en) | Multiple timing advance values for uplink dense deployments | |
| WO2025054937A1 (en) | Layer one measurement based on demodulation reference signal |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24926405 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |